Merge https://github.com/qmk/qmk_firmware

72 files changed, 23475 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2be156808
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Bootloader user application API functions.
+ */
+
+#include "BootloaderAPI.h"
+
+void BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	boot_page_erase_safe(Address);
+	boot_spm_busy_wait();
+	boot_rww_enable();
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	boot_page_write_safe(Address);
+	boot_spm_busy_wait();
+	boot_rww_enable();
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word)
+{
+	boot_page_fill_safe(Address, Word);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	return boot_signature_byte_get(Address);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(Address);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void)
+{
+	return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS);
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits)
+{
+	boot_lock_bits_set_safe(LockBits);
+}
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5169bbc3c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderAPI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_API_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADER_API_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPITable.S b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPITable.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2c60f84e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderAPITable.S
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+; Trampolines to actual API implementations if the target address is outside the
+; range of a rjmp instruction (can happen with large bootloader sections)
+.section .apitable_trampolines, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_Trampolines
+BootloaderAPI_Trampolines:
+
+	BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage
+	BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage
+	BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock
+	BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5:
+		ret
+
+
+
+; API function jump table
+.section .apitable_jumptable, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_JumpTable
+BootloaderAPI_JumpTable:
+
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1 ; UNUSED ENTRY 1
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2 ; UNUSED ENTRY 2
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3 ; UNUSED ENTRY 3
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4 ; UNUSED ENTRY 4
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5 ; UNUSED ENTRY 5
+
+
+
+; Bootloader table signatures and information
+.section .apitable_signatures, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_Signatures
+BootloaderAPI_Signatures:
+
+	.long BOOT_START_ADDR ; Start address of the bootloader
+	.word 0xDF00 ; Signature for the CDC class bootloader
+	.word 0xDCFB ; Signature for a LUFA class bootloader
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..aa17bc15b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.c
@@ -0,0 +1,673 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the CDC class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADERCDC_C
+#include "BootloaderCDC.h"
+
+/** Contains the current baud rate and other settings of the first virtual serial port. This must be retained as some
+ *  operating systems will not open the port unless the settings can be set successfully.
+ */
+static CDC_LineEncoding_t LineEncoding = { .BaudRateBPS = 0,
+                                           .CharFormat  = CDC_LINEENCODING_OneStopBit,
+                                           .ParityType  = CDC_PARITY_None,
+                                           .DataBits    = 8                            };
+
+/** Current address counter. This stores the current address of the FLASH or EEPROM as set by the host,
+ *  and is used when reading or writing to the AVRs memory (either FLASH or EEPROM depending on the issued
+ *  command.)
+ */
+static uint32_t CurrAddress;
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
+ *  via a watchdog reset. When cleared the bootloader will exit, starting the watchdog and entering an infinite
+ *  loop until the AVR restarts and the application runs.
+ */
+static bool RunBootloader = true;
+
+/** Magic lock for forced application start. If the HWBE fuse is programmed and BOOTRST is unprogrammed, the bootloader
+ *  will start if the /HWB line of the AVR is held low and the system is reset. However, if the /HWB line is still held
+ *  low when the application attempts to start via a watchdog reset, the bootloader will re-start. If set to the value
+ *  \ref MAGIC_BOOT_KEY the special init function \ref Application_Jump_Check() will force the application to start.
+ */
+uint16_t MagicBootKey ATTR_NO_INIT;
+
+
+/** Special startup routine to check if the bootloader was started via a watchdog reset, and if the magic application
+ *  start key has been loaded into \ref MagicBootKey. If the bootloader started via the watchdog and the key is valid,
+ *  this will force the user application to start via a software jump.
+ */
+void Application_Jump_Check(void)
+{
+	bool JumpToApplication = false;
+
+	#if (BOARD == BOARD_LEONARDO)
+		/* Enable pull-up on the IO13 pin so we can use it to select the mode */
+		PORTC |= (1 << 7);
+		Delay_MS(10);
+
+		/* If IO13 is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */
+		JumpToApplication = ((PINC & (1 << 7)) != 0);
+
+		/* Disable pull-up after the check has completed */
+		PORTC &= ~(1 << 7);
+	#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+		/* Disable JTAG debugging */
+		JTAG_DISABLE();
+
+		/* Enable pull-up on the JTAG TCK pin so we can use it to select the mode */
+		PORTF |= (1 << 4);
+		Delay_MS(10);
+
+		/* If the TCK pin is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */
+		JumpToApplication = ((PINF & (1 << 4)) != 0);
+
+		/* Re-enable JTAG debugging */
+		JTAG_ENABLE();
+	#else
+		/* Check if the device's BOOTRST fuse is set */
+		if (boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_HIGH_FUSE_BITS) & FUSE_BOOTRST)
+		{
+			/* If the reset source was not an external reset or the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application */
+			if (!(MCUSR & (1 << EXTRF)) || (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
+			  JumpToApplication = true;
+
+			/* Clear reset source */
+			MCUSR &= ~(1 << EXTRF);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application;
+			 * this can happen in the HWBE fuse is set, and the HBE pin is low during the watchdog reset */
+			if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
+				JumpToApplication = true;
+
+			/* Clear reset source */
+			MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+		}
+	#endif
+
+	/* Don't run the user application if the reset vector is blank (no app loaded) */
+	bool ApplicationValid = (pgm_read_word_near(0) != 0xFFFF);
+
+	/* If a request has been made to jump to the user application, honor it */
+	if (JumpToApplication && ApplicationValid)
+	{
+		/* Turn off the watchdog */
+		MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+		wdt_disable();
+
+		/* Clear the boot key and jump to the user application */
+		MagicBootKey = 0;
+
+		// cppcheck-suppress constStatement
+		((void (*)(void))0x0000)();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously
+ *  runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit, or hard-reset via the watchdog to start
+ *  the loaded application code.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	/* Setup hardware required for the bootloader */
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Turn on first LED on the board to indicate that the bootloader has started */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
+
+	/* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	while (RunBootloader)
+	{
+		CDC_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+
+	/* Wait a short time to end all USB transactions and then disconnect */
+	_delay_us(1000);
+
+	/* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */
+	USB_Detach();
+
+	/* Unlock the forced application start mode of the bootloader if it is restarted */
+	MagicBootKey = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY;
+
+	/* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */
+	wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
+
+	for (;;);
+}
+
+/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */
+static void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
+
+	/* Initialize the USB and other board hardware drivers */
+	USB_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+
+	/* Bootloader active LED toggle timer initialization */
+	TIMSK1 = (1 << TOIE1);
+	TCCR1B = ((1 << CS11) | (1 << CS10));
+}
+
+/** ISR to periodically toggle the LEDs on the board to indicate that the bootloader is active. */
+ISR(TIMER1_OVF_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready
+ *  to relay data to and from the attached USB host.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Setup CDC Notification, Rx and Tx Endpoints */
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT,
+	                           CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, 1);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Ignore any requests that aren't directed to the CDC interface */
+	if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & (CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE | CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT)) !=
+	    (REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+	{
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Activity - toggle indicator LEDs */
+	LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+
+	/* Process CDC specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case CDC_REQ_GetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the line coding data to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&LineEncoding, sizeof(CDC_LineEncoding_t));
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case CDC_REQ_SetLineEncoding:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Read the line coding data in from the host into the global struct */
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(&LineEncoding, sizeof(CDC_LineEncoding_t));
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			}
+
+			break;
+        case CDC_REQ_SetControlLineState:
+	        if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+	        {
+	            Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+	            Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+	        }
+
+	        break;
+	}
+}
+
+#if !defined(NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT)
+/** Reads or writes a block of EEPROM or FLASH memory to or from the appropriate CDC data endpoint, depending
+ *  on the AVR109 protocol command issued.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Command  Single character AVR109 protocol command indicating what memory operation to perform
+ */
+static void ReadWriteMemoryBlock(const uint8_t Command)
+{
+	uint16_t BlockSize;
+	char     MemoryType;
+
+	uint8_t  HighByte = 0;
+	uint8_t  LowByte  = 0;
+
+	BlockSize  = (FetchNextCommandByte() << 8);
+	BlockSize |=  FetchNextCommandByte();
+
+	MemoryType =  FetchNextCommandByte();
+
+	if ((MemoryType != MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH) && (MemoryType != MEMORY_TYPE_EEPROM))
+	{
+		/* Send error byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('?');
+
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if command is to read a memory block */
+	if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_BlockRead)
+	{
+		/* Re-enable RWW section */
+		boot_rww_enable();
+
+		while (BlockSize--)
+		{
+			if (MemoryType == MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH)
+			{
+				/* Read the next FLASH byte from the current FLASH page */
+				#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+				WriteNextResponseByte(pgm_read_byte_far(CurrAddress | HighByte));
+				#else
+				WriteNextResponseByte(pgm_read_byte(CurrAddress | HighByte));
+				#endif
+
+				/* If both bytes in current word have been read, increment the address counter */
+				if (HighByte)
+				  CurrAddress += 2;
+
+				HighByte = !HighByte;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Read the next EEPROM byte into the endpoint */
+				WriteNextResponseByte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)(intptr_t)(CurrAddress >> 1)));
+
+				/* Increment the address counter after use */
+				CurrAddress += 2;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		uint32_t PageStartAddress = CurrAddress;
+
+		if (MemoryType == MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH)
+		{
+			boot_page_erase(PageStartAddress);
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+		}
+
+		while (BlockSize--)
+		{
+			if (MemoryType == MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH)
+			{
+				/* If both bytes in current word have been written, increment the address counter */
+				if (HighByte)
+				{
+					/* Write the next FLASH word to the current FLASH page */
+					boot_page_fill(CurrAddress, ((FetchNextCommandByte() << 8) | LowByte));
+
+					/* Increment the address counter after use */
+					CurrAddress += 2;
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					LowByte = FetchNextCommandByte();
+				}
+
+				HighByte = !HighByte;
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Write the next EEPROM byte from the endpoint */
+				eeprom_update_byte((uint8_t*)((intptr_t)(CurrAddress >> 1)), FetchNextCommandByte());
+
+				/* Increment the address counter after use */
+				CurrAddress += 2;
+			}
+		}
+
+		/* If in FLASH programming mode, commit the page after writing */
+		if (MemoryType == MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH)
+		{
+			/* Commit the flash page to memory */
+			boot_page_write(PageStartAddress);
+
+			/* Wait until write operation has completed */
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+		}
+
+		/* Send response byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+}
+#endif
+
+/** Retrieves the next byte from the host in the CDC data OUT endpoint, and clears the endpoint bank if needed
+ *  to allow reception of the next data packet from the host.
+ *
+ *  \return Next received byte from the host in the CDC data OUT endpoint
+ */
+static uint8_t FetchNextCommandByte(void)
+{
+	/* Select the OUT endpoint so that the next data byte can be read */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPADDR);
+
+	/* If OUT endpoint empty, clear it and wait for the next packet from the host */
+	while (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+		{
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return 0;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Fetch the next byte from the OUT endpoint */
+	return Endpoint_Read_8();
+}
+
+/** Writes the next response byte to the CDC data IN endpoint, and sends the endpoint back if needed to free up the
+ *  bank when full ready for the next byte in the packet to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Response  Next response byte to send to the host
+ */
+static void WriteNextResponseByte(const uint8_t Response)
+{
+	/* Select the IN endpoint so that the next data byte can be written */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPADDR);
+
+	/* If IN endpoint full, clear it and wait until ready for the next packet to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+		{
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Write the next byte to the IN endpoint */
+	Endpoint_Write_8(Response);
+}
+
+/** Task to read in AVR109 commands from the CDC data OUT endpoint, process them, perform the required actions
+ *  and send the appropriate response back to the host.
+ */
+static void CDC_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Select the OUT endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check if endpoint has a command in it sent from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+	  return;
+
+	/* Read in the bootloader command (first byte sent from host) */
+	uint8_t Command = FetchNextCommandByte();
+
+	if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ExitBootloader)
+	{
+		RunBootloader = false;
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	else if ((Command == AVR109_COMMAND_SetLED) || (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ClearLED) ||
+	         (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_SelectDeviceType))
+	{
+		FetchNextCommandByte();
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	else if ((Command == AVR109_COMMAND_EnterProgrammingMode) || (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_LeaveProgrammingMode))
+	{
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadPartCode)
+	{
+		/* Return ATMEGA128 part code - this is only to allow AVRProg to use the bootloader */
+		WriteNextResponseByte(0x44);
+		WriteNextResponseByte(0x00);
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadAutoAddressIncrement)
+	{
+		/* Indicate auto-address increment is supported */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('Y');
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_SetCurrentAddress)
+	{
+		/* Set the current address to that given by the host (translate 16-bit word address to byte address) */
+		CurrAddress   = (FetchNextCommandByte() << 9);
+		CurrAddress  |= (FetchNextCommandByte() << 1);
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderInterface)
+	{
+		/* Indicate serial programmer back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('S');
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderIdentifier)
+	{
+		/* Write the 7-byte software identifier to the endpoint */
+		for (uint8_t CurrByte = 0; CurrByte < 7; CurrByte++)
+		  WriteNextResponseByte(SOFTWARE_IDENTIFIER[CurrByte]);
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderSWVersion)
+	{
+		WriteNextResponseByte('0' + BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MAJOR);
+		WriteNextResponseByte('0' + BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR);
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadSignature)
+	{
+		WriteNextResponseByte(AVR_SIGNATURE_3);
+		WriteNextResponseByte(AVR_SIGNATURE_2);
+		WriteNextResponseByte(AVR_SIGNATURE_1);
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_EraseFLASH)
+	{
+		/* Clear the application section of flash */
+		for (uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0; CurrFlashAddress < (uint32_t)BOOT_START_ADDR; CurrFlashAddress += SPM_PAGESIZE)
+		{
+			boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress);
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+			boot_page_write(CurrFlashAddress);
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+		}
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	#if !defined(NO_LOCK_BYTE_WRITE_SUPPORT)
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_WriteLockbits)
+	{
+		/* Set the lock bits to those given by the host */
+		boot_lock_bits_set(FetchNextCommandByte());
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	#endif
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadLockbits)
+	{
+		WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS));
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadLowFuses)
+	{
+		WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOW_FUSE_BITS));
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadHighFuses)
+	{
+		WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_HIGH_FUSE_BITS));
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadExtendedFuses)
+	{
+		WriteNextResponseByte(boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_EXTENDED_FUSE_BITS));
+	}
+	#if !defined(NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT)
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_GetBlockWriteSupport)
+	{
+		WriteNextResponseByte('Y');
+
+		/* Send block size to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte(SPM_PAGESIZE >> 8);
+		WriteNextResponseByte(SPM_PAGESIZE & 0xFF);
+	}
+	else if ((Command == AVR109_COMMAND_BlockWrite) || (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_BlockRead))
+	{
+		/* Delegate the block write/read to a separate function for clarity */
+		ReadWriteMemoryBlock(Command);
+	}
+	#endif
+	#if !defined(NO_FLASH_BYTE_SUPPORT)
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_FillFlashPageWordHigh)
+	{
+		/* Write the high byte to the current flash page */
+		boot_page_fill(CurrAddress, FetchNextCommandByte());
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_FillFlashPageWordLow)
+	{
+		/* Write the low byte to the current flash page */
+		boot_page_fill(CurrAddress | 0x01, FetchNextCommandByte());
+
+		/* Increment the address */
+		CurrAddress += 2;
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_WriteFlashPage)
+	{
+		/* Commit the flash page to memory */
+		boot_page_write(CurrAddress);
+
+		/* Wait until write operation has completed */
+		boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadFLASHWord)
+	{
+		#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+		uint16_t ProgramWord = pgm_read_word_far(CurrAddress);
+		#else
+		uint16_t ProgramWord = pgm_read_word(CurrAddress);
+		#endif
+
+		WriteNextResponseByte(ProgramWord >> 8);
+		WriteNextResponseByte(ProgramWord & 0xFF);
+	}
+	#endif
+	#if !defined(NO_EEPROM_BYTE_SUPPORT)
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_WriteEEPROM)
+	{
+		/* Read the byte from the endpoint and write it to the EEPROM */
+		eeprom_update_byte((uint8_t*)((intptr_t)(CurrAddress >> 1)), FetchNextCommandByte());
+
+		/* Increment the address after use */
+		CurrAddress += 2;
+
+		/* Send confirmation byte back to the host */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('\r');
+	}
+	else if (Command == AVR109_COMMAND_ReadEEPROM)
+	{
+		/* Read the EEPROM byte and write it to the endpoint */
+		WriteNextResponseByte(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)((intptr_t)(CurrAddress >> 1))));
+
+		/* Increment the address after use */
+		CurrAddress += 2;
+	}
+	#endif
+	else if (Command != AVR109_COMMAND_Sync)
+	{
+		/* Unknown (non-sync) command, return fail code */
+		WriteNextResponseByte('?');
+	}
+
+	/* Select the IN endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_TX_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Remember if the endpoint is completely full before clearing it */
+	bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+
+	/* Send the endpoint data to the host */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* If a full endpoint's worth of data was sent, we need to send an empty packet afterwards to signal end of transfer */
+	if (IsEndpointFull)
+	{
+		while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+		{
+			if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+	}
+
+	/* Wait until the data has been sent to the host */
+	while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+	{
+		if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+		  return;
+	}
+
+	/* Select the OUT endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(CDC_RX_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Acknowledge the command from the host */
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+}
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b6543aa73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.h
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderCDC.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CDC_H_
+#define _CDC_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "BootloaderAPI.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__OPTIMIZE_SIZE__)
+			#error This bootloader requires that it be optimized for size, not speed, to fit into the target device. Change optimization settings and try again.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Version major of the CDC bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MAJOR     0x01
+
+		/** Version minor of the CDC bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR     0x00
+
+		/** Hardware version major of the CDC bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_HWVERSION_MAJOR   0x01
+
+		/** Hardware version minor of the CDC bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_HWVERSION_MINOR   0x00
+
+		/** Eight character bootloader firmware identifier reported to the host when requested. */
+		#define SOFTWARE_IDENTIFIER          "LUFACDC"
+
+		/** Magic bootloader key to unlock forced application start mode. */
+		#define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY               0xDC42
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Possible memory types that can be addressed via the bootloader. */
+		enum AVR109_Memories
+		{
+			MEMORY_TYPE_FLASH  = 'F',
+			MEMORY_TYPE_EEPROM = 'E',
+		};
+
+		/** Possible commands that can be issued to the bootloader. */
+		enum AVR109_Commands
+		{
+			AVR109_COMMAND_Sync                     = 27,
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadEEPROM               = 'd',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_WriteEEPROM              = 'D',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadFLASHWord            = 'R',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_WriteFlashPage           = 'm',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_FillFlashPageWordLow     = 'c',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_FillFlashPageWordHigh    = 'C',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_GetBlockWriteSupport     = 'b',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_BlockWrite               = 'B',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_BlockRead                = 'g',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadExtendedFuses        = 'Q',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadHighFuses            = 'N',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadLowFuses             = 'F',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadLockbits             = 'r',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_WriteLockbits            = 'l',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_EraseFLASH               = 'e',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadSignature            = 's',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderSWVersion  = 'V',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderHWVersion  = 'v',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderIdentifier = 'S',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadBootloaderInterface  = 'p',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_SetCurrentAddress        = 'A',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadAutoAddressIncrement = 'a',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ReadPartCode             = 't',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_EnterProgrammingMode     = 'P',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_LeaveProgrammingMode     = 'L',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_SelectDeviceType         = 'T',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_SetLED                   = 'x',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ClearLED                 = 'y',
+			AVR109_COMMAND_ExitBootloader           = 'E',
+		};
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a non-returning pointer to the start of the loaded application in flash memory. */
+		typedef void (*AppPtr_t)(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		static void CDC_Task(void);
+		static void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void Application_Jump_Check(void) ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADERCDC_C) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			#if !defined(NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT)
+			static void    ReadWriteMemoryBlock(const uint8_t Command);
+			#endif
+			static uint8_t FetchNextCommandByte(void);
+			static void    WriteNextResponseByte(const uint8_t Response);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f8c349cde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/BootloaderCDC.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,242 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage CDC Class USB AVR Bootloader
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  This bootloader enumerates to the host as a CDC Class device (virtual serial port), allowing for AVR109
+ *  protocol compatible programming software to load firmware onto the AVR.
+ *
+ *  Out of the box this bootloader builds for the AT90USB1287 with an 8KB bootloader section size, and will fit
+ *  into 4KB of bootloader space. If you wish to alter this size and/or change the AVR model, you will need to
+ *  edit the MCU, FLASH_SIZE_KB and BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB values in the accompanying makefile.
+ *
+ *  When the bootloader is running, the board's LED(s) will flash at regular intervals to distinguish the
+ *  bootloader from the normal user application.
+ *
+ *  \warning <b>THIS BOOTLOADER IS NOT SECURE.</b> Malicious entities can recover written data, even if the device
+ *           lockbits are set.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Running Running the Bootloader
+ *
+ *  On the USB AVR8 devices, setting the \c HWBE device fuse will cause the bootloader to run if the \c HWB pin of
+ *  the AVR is grounded when the device is reset.
+ *
+ *  The are two behaviours of this bootloader, depending on the device's fuses:
+ *
+ *  <b>If the device's BOOTRST fuse is set</b>, the bootloader will run any time the system is reset from
+ *  the external reset pin, unless no valid user application has been loaded. To initiate the bootloader, the
+ *  device's external reset pin should be grounded momentarily.
+ *
+ *  <b>If the device's BOOTRST fuse is not set</b>, the bootloader will run only if initiated via a software
+ *  jump, or if the \c HWB pin was low during the last device reset (if the \c HWBE fuse is set).
+ *
+ *  For board specific exceptions to the above, see below.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_XPLAIN Atmel Xplain Board
+ *  Ground the USB AVR JTAG's \c TCK pin to ground when powering on the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the
+ *  \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_Leonardo Arduino Leonardo Board
+ *  Ground \c IO13 when powering the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the
+ *  \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation
+ *
+ *  After running this bootloader for the first time on a new computer, you will need to supply the .INF
+ *  file located in this bootloader project's directory as the device's driver when running under Windows.
+ *  This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers, negating the need for custom drivers for the
+ *  device. Other Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application
+ *
+ *  This bootloader is compatible with the open source application AVRDUDE, Atmel's AVRPROG, or other
+ *  applications implementing the AVR109 protocol, which is documented on the Atmel website as an application
+ *  note.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_AVRDude AVRDUDE (Windows, Mac, Linux)
+ *
+ *  AVRDude is a free, cross-platform and open source command line programmer for Atmel and third party AVR
+ *  programmers. It is available on the the Windows platform as part of the "WinAVR" package, or on other systems
+ *  either from a build from the official source code, or in many distributions as a precompiled binary package.
+ *
+ *  To load a new HEX file with AVRDude, specify "AVR109" as the programmer, with the allocated COM port. On Windows
+ *  platforms this will be a COMx port name:
+ *  \code
+ *  avrdude -c AVR109 -p at90usb1287 -P COM0 -U flash:w:Mouse.hex
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  On Linux systems, this will typically be a /dev/ttyACMx port name:
+ *  \code
+ *  avrdude -c AVR109 -p at90usb1287 -P /dev/ttyACM0 -U flash:w:Mouse.hex
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  Refer to the AVRDude project documentation for additional usage instructions.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_API User Application API
+ *
+ *  Several user application functions for FLASH and other special memory area manipulations are exposed by the bootloader,
+ *  allowing the user application to call into the bootloader at runtime to read and write FLASH data.
+ *
+ *  By default, the bootloader API jump table is located 32 bytes from the end of the device's FLASH memory, and follows the
+ *  following layout:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE          32
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START         ((FLASHEND + 1UL) - BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE)
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(Index)         (void*)((BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (Index * 2)) / 2)
+ *
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_ErasePage)(uint32_t Address)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(0);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_WritePage)(uint32_t Address)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(1);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_FillWord)(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Word) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(2);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature)(uint16_t Address)           = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(3);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse)(uint16_t Address)                = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(4);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadLock)(void)                            = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(5);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_WriteLock)(uint8_t LockBits)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(6);
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START   (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 2))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE         0xDCFB
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START   (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 4))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_CDC_SIGNATURE           0xDF00
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START           (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 8))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_LENGTH          4
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  From the application the API support of the bootloader can be detected by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address
+ *  \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them to the value \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE. The class of bootloader
+ *  can be determined by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address \c BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them
+ *  to the value \c BOOTLOADER_CDC_SIGNATURE. The start address of the bootloader can be retrieved by reading the bytes of FLASH
+ *  memory starting from address \c BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_API_MemLayout Device Memory Map
+ *  The following illustration indicates the final memory map of the device when loaded with the bootloader.
+ *
+ *  \verbatim
+ *  +----------------------------+ 0x0000
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |      User Application      |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |   Bootloader Application   |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 96
+ *  |   API Table Trampolines    |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 32
+ *  |    Bootloader API Table    |
+ *  |   (User App. Accessible)   |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 8
+ *  |   Bootloader ID Constants  |
+ *  |   (User App. Accessible)   |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND
+ *  \endverbatim
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues:
+ *
+ *  \par On Linux machines, the CDC bootloader is unstable or inaccessible.
+ *  A change to the \c ModemManager module in many Linux distributions causes
+ *  this module to try to take control over inserted CDC devices, corrupting the
+ *  datastream. A UDEV rule is required to prevent this.
+ *  See <a href=https://groups.google.com/d/msg/lufa-support/CP9cy2bc8yo/kBqsOu-RBeMJ>here</a> for resolution steps.
+ *  If the issue still persists then uninstall modemmanager by executing <tt>sudo apt-get remove modemmanager</tt>, or
+ *  the equivalent using your chosen distribution's package manager.
+ *
+ *  \par On Linux machines, the CDC bootloader is inaccessible.
+ *  On many Linux systems, non-root users do not have automatic access to newly
+ *  inserted CDC devices. Root privileges or a UDEV rule is required to gain
+ *  access.
+ *  See <a href=https://groups.google.com/d/msg/lufa-support/CP9cy2bc8yo/kBqsOu-RBeMJ>here</a> for resolution steps.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to disable memory block read/write support in the bootloader, requiring all reads and writes to be made
+ *        using the byte-level commands.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_EEPROM_BYTE_SUPPORT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to disable EEPROM memory byte read/write support in the bootloader, requiring all EEPROM reads and writes
+ *        to be made using the block-level commands.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_FLASH_BYTE_SUPPORT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to disable FLASH memory byte read/write support in the bootloader, requiring all FLASH reads and writes
+ *        to be made using the block-level commands.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_LOCK_BYTE_WRITE_SUPPORT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to disable lock byte write support in the bootloader, preventing the lock bits from being set programmatically.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/AppConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..22972b72f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure LUFA's
+ *  compile time options, as an alternative to the compile time
+ *  constants supplied through a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+//	#define NO_BLOCK_SUPPORT
+//	#define NO_EEPROM_BYTE_SUPPORT
+//	#define NO_FLASH_BYTE_SUPPORT
+//	#define NO_LOCK_BYTE_WRITE_SUPPORT
+
+#endif
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5aa0e765b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..627657037
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,244 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+	.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204A,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = 0x00,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = 0x02,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x02,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = 0x06,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA CDC");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see LUFA library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint16_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Language)
+			{
+				Address = &LanguageString;
+				Size    = LanguageString.Header.Size;
+			}
+			else if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Manufacturer)
+			{
+				Address = &ManufacturerString;
+				Size    = ManufacturerString.Header.Size;
+			}
+			else if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Product)
+			{
+				Address = &ProductString;
+				Size    = ProductString.Header.Size;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a6fbf5262
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x97
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x96
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x97
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x96
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x95
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x87
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x88
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x95
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x8A
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x89
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x93
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x89
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__)
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x93
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#else
+			#error The selected AVR part is not currently supported by this bootloader.
+		#endif
+
+		/** Endpoint address for the CDC control interface event notification endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address for the CDC data interface TX (data IN) endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address for the CDC data interface RX (data OUT) endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size of the CDC data interface TX and RX data endpoint banks, in bytes. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+		/** Size of the CDC control interface notification endpoint bank, in bytes. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint16_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..61624c731
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+;************************************************************
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204A
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA CDC Class Bootloader"
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..02e7063c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+	<project caption="CDC Bootloader - 128KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc.avr8.128_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_cdc_128kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.cdc"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1F000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1F000"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FFA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FFE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FFF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="CDC Bootloader - 64KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc.avr8.64_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_cdc_64kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.cdc"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="at90usb647"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0xF000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0xF000"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0xFFA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0xFFE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0xFFF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="CDC Bootloader - 32KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc.avr8.32_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_cdc_32kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.cdc"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x7000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x7000"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x7FA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x7FE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x7FF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="CDC Bootloader - 16KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc.avr8.16_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_cdc_16kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.cdc"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="atmega16u2"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x3000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x3000"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x3FA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x3FE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x3FF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="CDC Bootloader - 8KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc.avr8.8_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_cdc_8kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.cdc"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="atmega8u2"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1000"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<module type="application" id="lufa.bootloaders.cdc" caption="CDC Bootloader">
+		<info type="description" value="summary">
+		CDC Class Bootloader, capable of reprogramming a device using avrdude or other AVR109 protocol compliant software when plugged into a host.
+		</info>
+
+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+			<keyword value="Bootloaders"/>
+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>
+		</info>
+
+ 		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+		<build type="include-path" value="."/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderCDC.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderCDC.h"/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderAPI.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderAPI.h"/>
+		<build type="asm-source" value="BootloaderAPITable.S"/>
+
+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>
+
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="BootloaderCDC.txt"/>
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA CDC Bootloader.inf"/>
+
+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+	</module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..414693479
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2396 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.9
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - CDC Class Bootloader"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included
+# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55
+# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy
+# the logo to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new
+# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part
+# of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or
+# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO,
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option
+# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will
+# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to
+# YES the compound reference will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo
+# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test
+# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete
+# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty,
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated
+# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated
+# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty
+# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred
+# to HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created
+# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen
+# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code
+# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_SOURCE_CODE        = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an
+# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the
+# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is
+# still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM \
+                         ATTR_NO_INIT
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in
+# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by
+# the !include statement in a plantuml block.
+
+PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH  =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..aa5a2117d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/CDC/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = BootloaderCDC
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c BootloaderAPI.c BootloaderAPITable.S $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET)
+LD_FLAGS     = -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) $(BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS)
+
+# Flash size and bootloader section sizes of the target, in KB. These must
+# match the target's total FLASH size and the bootloader size set in the
+# device's fuses.
+FLASH_SIZE_KB         = 128
+BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB  = 8
+
+# Bootloader address calculation formulas
+# Do not modify these macros, but rather modify the dependent values above.
+CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX   = $(shell printf "0x%X" $$(( $(1) )) )
+BOOT_START_OFFSET     = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 )
+BOOT_SEC_OFFSET       = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) * 1024) - ($(strip $(1))) )
+
+# Bootloader linker section flags for relocating the API table sections to
+# known FLASH addresses - these should not normally be user-edited.
+BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG  = -Wl,--section-start=$(strip $(1))=$(call BOOT_SEC_OFFSET, $(3)) -Wl,--undefined=$(strip $(2))
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS     = $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_trampolines, BootloaderAPI_Trampolines, 96)
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS    += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_jumptable,   BootloaderAPI_JumpTable,   32)
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS    += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_signatures,  BootloaderAPI_Signatures,  8)
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules
+DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA
+include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk
+include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk
+
+# Include common DMBS build system modules
+DMBS_PATH      ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..491c506d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Bootloader user application API functions.
+ */
+
+#include "BootloaderAPI.h"
+
+void BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	boot_page_erase_safe(Address);
+	boot_spm_busy_wait();
+	boot_rww_enable();
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	boot_page_write_safe(Address);
+	boot_spm_busy_wait();
+	boot_rww_enable();
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word)
+{
+	boot_page_fill_safe(Address, Word);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	return boot_signature_byte_get(Address);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(Address);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void)
+{
+	return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS);
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits)
+{
+	boot_lock_bits_set_safe(LockBits);
+}
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5169bbc3c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderAPI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_API_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADER_API_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPITable.S b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPITable.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..95fd8e5c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderAPITable.S
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+; Trampolines to actual API implementations if the target address is outside the
+; range of a rjmp instruction (can happen with large bootloader sections)
+.section .apitable_trampolines, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_Trampolines
+BootloaderAPI_Trampolines:
+
+	BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage
+	BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage
+	BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock
+	BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5:
+		ret
+
+
+
+; API function jump table
+.section .apitable_jumptable, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_JumpTable
+BootloaderAPI_JumpTable:
+
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1 ; UNUSED ENTRY 1
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2 ; UNUSED ENTRY 2
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3 ; UNUSED ENTRY 3
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4 ; UNUSED ENTRY 4
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5 ; UNUSED ENTRY 5
+
+
+
+; Bootloader table signatures and information
+.section .apitable_signatures, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_Signatures
+BootloaderAPI_Signatures:
+
+	.long BOOT_START_ADDR ; Start address of the bootloader
+	.word 0xDF10 ; Signature for the DFU class bootloader, V1
+	.word 0xDCFB ; Signature for a LUFA class bootloader
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..928cf6fe3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.c
@@ -0,0 +1,891 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the DFU class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_C
+#include "BootloaderDFU.h"
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader is currently running in secure mode, disallowing memory operations
+ *  other than erase. This is initially set to the value set by SECURE_MODE, and cleared by the bootloader
+ *  once a memory erase has completed in a bootloader session.
+ */
+static bool IsSecure = SECURE_MODE;
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
+ *  via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application
+ *  jumped to via an indirect jump to location 0x0000 (or other location specified by the host).
+ */
+static bool RunBootloader = true;
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader is waiting to exit. When the host requests the bootloader to exit and
+ *  jump to the application address it specifies, it sends two sequential commands which must be properly
+ *  acknowledged. Upon reception of the first the RunBootloader flag is cleared and the WaitForExit flag is set,
+ *  causing the bootloader to wait for the final exit command before shutting down.
+ */
+static bool WaitForExit = false;
+
+/** Current DFU state machine state, one of the values in the DFU_State_t enum. */
+static uint8_t DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
+
+/** Status code of the last executed DFU command. This is set to one of the values in the DFU_Status_t enum after
+ *  each operation, and returned to the host when a Get Status DFU request is issued.
+ */
+static uint8_t DFU_Status = OK;
+
+/** Data containing the DFU command sent from the host. */
+static DFU_Command_t SentCommand;
+
+/** Response to the last issued Read Data DFU command. Unlike other DFU commands, the read command
+ *  requires a single byte response from the bootloader containing the read data when the next DFU_UPLOAD command
+ *  is issued by the host.
+ */
+static uint8_t ResponseByte;
+
+/** Pointer to the start of the user application. By default this is 0x0000 (the reset vector), however the host
+ *  may specify an alternate address when issuing the application soft-start command.
+ */
+static AppPtr_t AppStartPtr = (AppPtr_t)0x0000;
+
+/** 64-bit flash page number. This is concatenated with the current 16-bit address on USB AVRs containing more than
+ *  64KB of flash memory.
+ */
+static uint8_t Flash64KBPage = 0;
+
+/** Memory start address, indicating the current address in the memory being addressed (either FLASH or EEPROM
+ *  depending on the issued command from the host).
+ */
+static uint16_t StartAddr = 0x0000;
+
+/** Memory end address, indicating the end address to read from/write to in the memory being addressed (either FLASH
+ *  of EEPROM depending on the issued command from the host).
+ */
+static uint16_t EndAddr = 0x0000;
+
+/** Magic lock for forced application start. If the HWBE fuse is programmed and BOOTRST is unprogrammed, the bootloader
+ *  will start if the /HWB line of the AVR is held low and the system is reset. However, if the /HWB line is still held
+ *  low when the application attempts to start via a watchdog reset, the bootloader will re-start. If set to the value
+ *  \ref MAGIC_BOOT_KEY the special init function \ref Application_Jump_Check() will force the application to start.
+ */
+uint16_t MagicBootKey ATTR_NO_INIT;
+
+
+/** Special startup routine to check if the bootloader was started via a watchdog reset, and if the magic application
+ *  start key has been loaded into \ref MagicBootKey. If the bootloader started via the watchdog and the key is valid,
+ *  this will force the user application to start via a software jump.
+ */
+void Application_Jump_Check(void)
+{
+	bool JumpToApplication = false;
+
+	#if (BOARD == BOARD_LEONARDO)
+		/* Enable pull-up on the IO13 pin so we can use it to select the mode */
+		PORTC |= (1 << 7);
+		Delay_MS(10);
+
+		/* If IO13 is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */
+		JumpToApplication = ((PINC & (1 << 7)) != 0);
+
+		/* Disable pull-up after the check has completed */
+		PORTC &= ~(1 << 7);
+	#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+		/* Disable JTAG debugging */
+		JTAG_DISABLE();
+
+		/* Enable pull-up on the JTAG TCK pin so we can use it to select the mode */
+		PORTF |= (1 << 4);
+		Delay_MS(10);
+
+		/* If the TCK pin is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */
+		JumpToApplication = ((PINF & (1 << 4)) != 0);
+
+		/* Re-enable JTAG debugging */
+		JTAG_ENABLE();
+	#else
+		/* Check if the device's BOOTRST fuse is set */
+		if (boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_HIGH_FUSE_BITS) & FUSE_BOOTRST)
+		{
+			/* If the reset source was not an external reset or the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application */
+			//if (!(MCUSR & (1 << EXTRF)) || (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
+			//  JumpToApplication = true;
+
+			/* Clear reset source */
+			MCUSR &= ~(1 << EXTRF);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application;
+			 * this can happen in the HWBE fuse is set, and the HBE pin is low during the watchdog reset */
+			//if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
+			//	JumpToApplication = true;
+
+			/* Clear reset source */
+			MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+		}
+	#endif
+
+	/* Don't run the user application if the reset vector is blank (no app loaded) */
+	bool ApplicationValid = (pgm_read_word_near(0) != 0xFFFF);
+
+	/* If a request has been made to jump to the user application, honor it */
+	if (JumpToApplication && ApplicationValid)
+	{
+		/* Turn off the watchdog */
+		MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+		wdt_disable();
+
+		/* Clear the boot key and jump to the user application */
+		MagicBootKey = 0;
+
+		// cppcheck-suppress constStatement
+		((void (*)(void))0x0000)();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously
+ *  runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit, or hard-reset via the watchdog to start
+ *  the loaded application code.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	/* Configure hardware required by the bootloader */
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Turn on first LED on the board to indicate that the bootloader has started */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+
+	/* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+
+	#if (BOARD == BOARD_QMK)
+		uint16_t keypress = 0;
+	#endif
+
+	/* Run the USB management task while the bootloader is supposed to be running */
+	while (RunBootloader || WaitForExit) {
+	  USB_USBTask();
+	  #if (BOARD == BOARD_QMK)
+	  	bool pressed = (PIN(QMK_ESC_ROW) & NUM(QMK_ESC_ROW));
+		if ((DFU_State == dfuIDLE) && (keypress > 5000) && pressed) {
+			break;
+		}
+		if (pressed) {
+		  	keypress++;
+		} else {
+		  	keypress = 0;
+		}
+
+	  #endif
+	}
+
+	/* Reset configured hardware back to their original states for the user application */
+	ResetHardware();
+
+	/* Start the user application */
+	AppStartPtr();
+}
+
+/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */
+static void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
+
+	#if (BOARD == BOARD_QMK)
+		// column setup
+		DDR(QMK_ESC_COL) |= NUM(QMK_ESC_COL);
+		PORT(QMK_ESC_COL) |= NUM(QMK_ESC_COL);
+
+		// row setup
+		DDR(QMK_ESC_ROW) |= NUM(QMK_ESC_ROW);
+	#endif
+
+	/* Initialize the USB and other board hardware drivers */
+	USB_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+
+	/* Bootloader active LED toggle timer initialization */
+	TIMSK1 = (1 << TOIE1);
+	TCCR1B = ((1 << CS11) | (1 << CS10));
+
+}	
+
+/** Resets all configured hardware required for the bootloader back to their original states. */
+static void ResetHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Shut down the USB and other board hardware drivers */
+	USB_Disable();
+	LEDs_Disable();
+
+	/* Disable Bootloader active LED toggle timer */
+	TIMSK1 = 0;
+	TCCR1B = 0;
+
+	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table back to the application section */
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
+	MCUCR = 0;
+
+	#if (BOARD == BOARD_QMK)
+		DDR(QMK_ESC_COL) = PORT(QMK_ESC_COL) = DDR(QMK_ESC_ROW) = PORT(QMK_ESC_ROW) = 0;
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** ISR to periodically toggle the LEDs on the board to indicate that the bootloader is active. */
+ISR(TIMER1_OVF_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Ignore any requests that aren't directed to the DFU interface */
+	if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & (CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE | CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT)) !=
+	    (REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+	{
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Activity - toggle indicator LEDs */
+	LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+
+	/* Get the size of the command and data from the wLength value */
+	SentCommand.DataSize = USB_ControlRequest.wLength;
+
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case DFU_REQ_DNLOAD:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+			/* Check if bootloader is waiting to terminate */
+			if (WaitForExit)
+			{
+				/* Bootloader is terminating - process last received command */
+				ProcessBootloaderCommand();
+
+				/* Indicate that the last command has now been processed - free to exit bootloader */
+				WaitForExit = false;
+			}
+
+			/* If the request has a data stage, load it into the command struct */
+			if (SentCommand.DataSize)
+			{
+				while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+				{
+					if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+					  return;
+				}
+
+				/* First byte of the data stage is the DNLOAD request's command */
+				SentCommand.Command = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+				/* One byte of the data stage is the command, so subtract it from the total data bytes */
+				SentCommand.DataSize--;
+
+				/* Load in the rest of the data stage as command parameters */
+				for (uint8_t DataByte = 0; (DataByte < sizeof(SentCommand.Data)) &&
+				     Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint(); DataByte++)
+				{
+					SentCommand.Data[DataByte] = Endpoint_Read_8();
+					SentCommand.DataSize--;
+				}
+
+				/* Process the command */
+				ProcessBootloaderCommand();
+			}
+
+			/* Check if currently downloading firmware */
+			if (DFU_State == dfuDNLOAD_IDLE)
+			{
+				if (!(SentCommand.DataSize))
+				{
+					DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					/* Throw away the filler bytes before the start of the firmware */
+					DiscardFillerBytes(DFU_FILLER_BYTES_SIZE);
+
+					/* Throw away the packet alignment filler bytes before the start of the firmware */
+					DiscardFillerBytes(StartAddr % FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE);
+
+					/* Calculate the number of bytes remaining to be written */
+					uint16_t BytesRemaining = ((EndAddr - StartAddr) + 1);
+
+					if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))        // Write flash
+					{
+						/* Calculate the number of words to be written from the number of bytes to be written */
+						uint16_t WordsRemaining = (BytesRemaining >> 1);
+
+						union
+						{
+							uint16_t Words[2];
+							uint32_t Long;
+						} CurrFlashAddress                 = {.Words = {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}};
+
+						uint32_t CurrFlashPageStartAddress = CurrFlashAddress.Long;
+						uint8_t  WordsInFlashPage          = 0;
+
+						while (WordsRemaining--)
+						{
+							/* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
+							if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+							{
+								Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+								while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+								{
+									if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+									  return;
+								}
+							}
+
+							/* Write the next word into the current flash page */
+							boot_page_fill(CurrFlashAddress.Long, Endpoint_Read_16_LE());
+
+							/* Adjust counters */
+							WordsInFlashPage      += 1;
+							CurrFlashAddress.Long += 2;
+
+							/* See if an entire page has been written to the flash page buffer */
+							if ((WordsInFlashPage == (SPM_PAGESIZE >> 1)) || !(WordsRemaining))
+							{
+								/* Commit the flash page to memory */
+								boot_page_write(CurrFlashPageStartAddress);
+								boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+								/* Check if programming incomplete */
+								if (WordsRemaining)
+								{
+									CurrFlashPageStartAddress = CurrFlashAddress.Long;
+									WordsInFlashPage          = 0;
+
+									/* Erase next page's temp buffer */
+									boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress.Long);
+									boot_spm_busy_wait();
+								}
+							}
+						}
+
+						/* Once programming complete, start address equals the end address */
+						StartAddr = EndAddr;
+
+						/* Re-enable the RWW section of flash */
+						boot_rww_enable();
+					}
+					else                                                   // Write EEPROM
+					{
+						while (BytesRemaining--)
+						{
+							/* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
+							if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+							{
+								Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+								while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+								{
+									if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+									  return;
+								}
+							}
+
+							/* Read the byte from the USB interface and write to to the EEPROM */
+							eeprom_update_byte((uint8_t*)StartAddr, Endpoint_Read_8());
+
+							/* Adjust counters */
+							StartAddr++;
+						}
+					}
+
+					/* Throw away the currently unused DFU file suffix */
+					DiscardFillerBytes(DFU_FILE_SUFFIX_SIZE);
+				}
+			}
+
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+
+			break;
+		case DFU_REQ_UPLOAD:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+			while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+			{
+				if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			if (DFU_State != dfuUPLOAD_IDLE)
+			{
+				if ((DFU_State == dfuERROR) && IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01))       // Blank Check
+				{
+					/* Blank checking is performed in the DFU_DNLOAD request - if we get here we've told the host
+					   that the memory isn't blank, and the host is requesting the first non-blank address */
+					Endpoint_Write_16_LE(StartAddr);
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					/* Idle state upload - send response to last issued command */
+					Endpoint_Write_8(ResponseByte);
+				}
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				/* Determine the number of bytes remaining in the current block */
+				uint16_t BytesRemaining = ((EndAddr - StartAddr) + 1);
+
+				if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))            // Read FLASH
+				{
+					/* Calculate the number of words to be written from the number of bytes to be written */
+					uint16_t WordsRemaining = (BytesRemaining >> 1);
+
+					union
+					{
+						uint16_t Words[2];
+						uint32_t Long;
+					} CurrFlashAddress = {.Words = {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}};
+
+					while (WordsRemaining--)
+					{
+						/* Check if endpoint is full - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
+						if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
+						{
+							Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+							while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+							{
+								if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+								  return;
+							}
+						}
+
+						/* Read the flash word and send it via USB to the host */
+						#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+							Endpoint_Write_16_LE(pgm_read_word_far(CurrFlashAddress.Long));
+						#else
+							Endpoint_Write_16_LE(pgm_read_word(CurrFlashAddress.Long));
+						#endif
+
+						/* Adjust counters */
+						CurrFlashAddress.Long += 2;
+					}
+
+					/* Once reading is complete, start address equals the end address */
+					StartAddr = EndAddr;
+				}
+				else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x02))       // Read EEPROM
+				{
+					while (BytesRemaining--)
+					{
+						/* Check if endpoint is full - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
+						if (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE)
+						{
+							Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+							while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+							{
+								if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+								  return;
+							}
+						}
+
+						/* Read the EEPROM byte and send it via USB to the host */
+						Endpoint_Write_8(eeprom_read_byte((uint8_t*)StartAddr));
+
+						/* Adjust counters */
+						StartAddr++;
+					}
+				}
+
+				/* Return to idle state */
+				DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
+			}
+
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;
+		case DFU_REQ_GETSTATUS:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+			while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+			{
+				if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Write 8-bit status value */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(DFU_Status);
+
+			/* Write 24-bit poll timeout value */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(0);
+			Endpoint_Write_16_LE(0);
+
+			/* Write 8-bit state value */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(DFU_State);
+
+			/* Write 8-bit state string ID number */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(0);
+
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;
+		case DFU_REQ_CLRSTATUS:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+			/* Reset the status value variable to the default OK status */
+			DFU_Status = OK;
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;
+		case DFU_REQ_GETSTATE:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+			while (!(Endpoint_IsINReady()))
+			{
+				if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Write the current device state to the endpoint */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(DFU_State);
+
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;
+		case DFU_REQ_ABORT:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+			/* Reset the current state variable to the default idle state */
+			DFU_State = dfuIDLE;
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Routine to discard the specified number of bytes from the control endpoint stream. This is used to
+ *  discard unused bytes in the stream from the host, including the memory program block suffix.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] NumberOfBytes  Number of bytes to discard from the host from the control endpoint
+ */
+static void DiscardFillerBytes(uint8_t NumberOfBytes)
+{
+	while (NumberOfBytes--)
+	{
+		if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+			/* Wait until next data packet received */
+			while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+			{
+				if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+				  return;
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			Endpoint_Discard_8();
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Routine to process an issued command from the host, via a DFU_DNLOAD request wrapper. This routine ensures
+ *  that the command is allowed based on the current secure mode flag value, and passes the command off to the
+ *  appropriate handler function.
+ */
+static void ProcessBootloaderCommand(void)
+{
+	/* Check if device is in secure mode */
+	if (IsSecure)
+	{
+		/* Don't process command unless it is a READ or chip erase command */
+		if (!(((SentCommand.Command == COMMAND_WRITE)             &&
+		        IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00, 0xFF)) ||
+			   (SentCommand.Command == COMMAND_READ)))
+		{
+			/* Set the state and status variables to indicate the error */
+			DFU_State  = dfuERROR;
+			DFU_Status = errWRITE;
+
+			/* Stall command */
+			Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+
+			/* Don't process the command */
+			return;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Dispatch the required command processing routine based on the command type */
+	switch (SentCommand.Command)
+	{
+		case COMMAND_PROG_START:
+			ProcessMemProgCommand();
+			break;
+		case COMMAND_DISP_DATA:
+			ProcessMemReadCommand();
+			break;
+		case COMMAND_WRITE:
+			ProcessWriteCommand();
+			break;
+		case COMMAND_READ:
+			ProcessReadCommand();
+			break;
+		case COMMAND_CHANGE_BASE_ADDR:
+			if (IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x03, 0x00))              // Set 64KB flash page command
+			  Flash64KBPage = SentCommand.Data[2];
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Routine to concatenate the given pair of 16-bit memory start and end addresses from the host, and store them
+ *  in the StartAddr and EndAddr global variables.
+ */
+static void LoadStartEndAddresses(void)
+{
+	union
+	{
+		uint8_t  Bytes[2];
+		uint16_t Word;
+	} Address[2] = {{.Bytes = {SentCommand.Data[2], SentCommand.Data[1]}},
+	                {.Bytes = {SentCommand.Data[4], SentCommand.Data[3]}}};
+
+	/* Load in the start and ending read addresses from the sent data packet */
+	StartAddr = Address[0].Word;
+	EndAddr   = Address[1].Word;
+}
+
+/** Handler for a Memory Program command issued by the host. This routine handles the preparations needed
+ *  to write subsequent data from the host into the specified memory.
+ */
+static void ProcessMemProgCommand(void)
+{
+	if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00) ||                          // Write FLASH command
+	    IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01))                            // Write EEPROM command
+	{
+		/* Load in the start and ending read addresses */
+		LoadStartEndAddresses();
+
+		/* If FLASH is being written to, we need to pre-erase the first page to write to */
+		if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))
+		{
+			union
+			{
+				uint16_t Words[2];
+				uint32_t Long;
+			} CurrFlashAddress = {.Words = {StartAddr, Flash64KBPage}};
+
+			/* Erase the current page's temp buffer */
+			boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress.Long);
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+		}
+
+		/* Set the state so that the next DNLOAD requests reads in the firmware */
+		DFU_State = dfuDNLOAD_IDLE;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Handler for a Memory Read command issued by the host. This routine handles the preparations needed
+ *  to read subsequent data from the specified memory out to the host, as well as implementing the memory
+ *  blank check command.
+ */
+static void ProcessMemReadCommand(void)
+{
+	if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00) ||                          // Read FLASH command
+        IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x02))                            // Read EEPROM command
+	{
+		/* Load in the start and ending read addresses */
+		LoadStartEndAddresses();
+
+		/* Set the state so that the next UPLOAD requests read out the firmware */
+		DFU_State = dfuUPLOAD_IDLE;
+	}
+	else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01))                       // Blank check FLASH command
+	{
+		uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0;
+
+		while (CurrFlashAddress < (uint32_t)BOOT_START_ADDR)
+		{
+			/* Check if the current byte is not blank */
+			#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+			if (pgm_read_byte_far(CurrFlashAddress) != 0xFF)
+			#else
+			if (pgm_read_byte(CurrFlashAddress) != 0xFF)
+			#endif
+			{
+				/* Save the location of the first non-blank byte for response back to the host */
+				Flash64KBPage = (CurrFlashAddress >> 16);
+				StartAddr     = CurrFlashAddress;
+
+				/* Set state and status variables to the appropriate error values */
+				DFU_State  = dfuERROR;
+				DFU_Status = errCHECK_ERASED;
+
+				break;
+			}
+
+			CurrFlashAddress++;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Handler for a Data Write command issued by the host. This routine handles non-programming commands such as
+ *  bootloader exit (both via software jumps and hardware watchdog resets) and flash memory erasure.
+ */
+static void ProcessWriteCommand(void)
+{
+	if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x03))                            // Start application
+	{
+		/* Indicate that the bootloader is terminating */
+		WaitForExit = true;
+
+		/* Check if data supplied for the Start Program command - no data executes the program */
+		if (SentCommand.DataSize)
+		{
+			if (SentCommand.Data[1] == 0x01)                                   // Start via jump
+			{
+				union
+				{
+					uint8_t  Bytes[2];
+					AppPtr_t FuncPtr;
+				} Address = {.Bytes = {SentCommand.Data[4], SentCommand.Data[3]}};
+
+				/* Load in the jump address into the application start address pointer */
+				AppStartPtr = Address.FuncPtr;
+			}
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			if (SentCommand.Data[1] == 0x00)                                   // Start via watchdog
+			{
+				/* Unlock the forced application start mode of the bootloader if it is restarted */
+				MagicBootKey = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY;
+
+				/* Start the watchdog to reset the AVR once the communications are finalized */
+				wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
+			}
+			else                                                               // Start via jump
+			{
+				/* Set the flag to terminate the bootloader at next opportunity if a valid application has been loaded */
+				if (pgm_read_word_near(0) == 0xFFFF)
+				  RunBootloader = false;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+	else if (IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00, 0xFF))                 // Erase flash
+	{
+		uint32_t CurrFlashAddress = 0;
+
+		/* Clear the application section of flash */
+		while (CurrFlashAddress < (uint32_t)BOOT_START_ADDR)
+		{
+			boot_page_erase(CurrFlashAddress);
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+			boot_page_write(CurrFlashAddress);
+			boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+			CurrFlashAddress += SPM_PAGESIZE;
+		}
+
+		/* Re-enable the RWW section of flash as writing to the flash locks it out */
+		boot_rww_enable();
+
+		/* Memory has been erased, reset the security bit so that programming/reading is allowed */
+		IsSecure = false;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Handler for a Data Read command issued by the host. This routine handles bootloader information retrieval
+ *  commands such as device signature and bootloader version retrieval.
+ */
+static void ProcessReadCommand(void)
+{
+	const uint8_t BootloaderInfo[3] = {BOOTLOADER_VERSION, BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE1, BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE2};
+	const uint8_t SignatureInfo[4]  = {0x58, AVR_SIGNATURE_1, AVR_SIGNATURE_2, AVR_SIGNATURE_3};
+
+	uint8_t DataIndexToRead    = SentCommand.Data[1];
+	bool    ReadAddressInvalid = false;
+
+	if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x00))                        // Read bootloader info
+	{
+		if (DataIndexToRead < 3)
+		  ResponseByte = BootloaderInfo[DataIndexToRead];
+		else
+		  ReadAddressInvalid = true;
+	}
+	else if (IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(SentCommand.Data, 0x01))                    // Read signature byte
+	{
+		switch (DataIndexToRead)
+		{
+			case 0x30:
+				ResponseByte = SignatureInfo[0];
+				break;
+			case 0x31:
+				ResponseByte = SignatureInfo[1];
+				break;
+			case 0x60:
+				ResponseByte = SignatureInfo[2];
+				break;
+			case 0x61:
+				ResponseByte = SignatureInfo[3];
+				break;
+			default:
+				ReadAddressInvalid = true;
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	if (ReadAddressInvalid)
+	{
+		/* Set the state and status variables to indicate the error */
+		DFU_State  = dfuERROR;
+		DFU_Status = errADDRESS;
+	}
+}
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a97ba6c7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.h
@@ -0,0 +1,216 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderDFU.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "BootloaderAPI.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__OPTIMIZE_SIZE__)
+			#error This bootloader requires that it be optimized for size, not speed, to fit into the target device. Change optimization settings and try again.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Major bootloader version number. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR 2
+
+		/** Minor bootloader version number. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION_REV   0
+
+		/** Magic bootloader key to unlock forced application start mode. */
+		#define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY           0xDC42
+
+		/** Complete bootloader version number expressed as a packed byte, constructed from the
+		 *  two individual bootloader version macros.
+		 */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_VERSION       ((BOOTLOADER_VERSION_MINOR << 4) | BOOTLOADER_VERSION_REV)
+
+		/** First byte of the bootloader identification bytes, used to identify a device's bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE1      0xDC
+
+		/** Second byte of the bootloader identification bytes, used to identify a device's bootloader. */
+		#define BOOTLOADER_ID_BYTE2      0xFB
+
+		/** Convenience macro, used to determine if the issued command is the given one-byte long command.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] dataarr  Command byte array to check against
+		 *  \param[in] cb1      First command byte to check
+		 */
+		#define IS_ONEBYTE_COMMAND(dataarr, cb1)       (dataarr[0] == (cb1))
+
+		/** Convenience macro, used to determine if the issued command is the given two-byte long command.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] dataarr  Command byte array to check against
+		 *  \param[in] cb1      First command byte to check
+		 *  \param[in] cb2      Second command byte to check
+		 */
+		#define IS_TWOBYTE_COMMAND(dataarr, cb1, cb2) ((dataarr[0] == (cb1)) && (dataarr[1] == (cb2)))
+
+		/** Length of the DFU file suffix block, appended to the end of each complete memory write command.
+		 *  The DFU file suffix is currently unused (but is designed to give extra file information, such as
+		 *  a CRC of the complete firmware for error checking) and so is discarded.
+		 */
+		#define DFU_FILE_SUFFIX_SIZE     16
+
+		/** Length of the DFU file filler block, appended to the start of each complete memory write command.
+		 *  Filler bytes are added to the start of each complete memory write command, and must be discarded.
+		 */
+		#define DFU_FILLER_BYTES_SIZE    26
+
+		/** DFU class command request to detach from the host. */
+		#define DFU_REQ_DETATCH          0x00
+
+		/** DFU class command request to send data from the host to the bootloader. */
+		#define DFU_REQ_DNLOAD           0x01
+
+		/** DFU class command request to send data from the bootloader to the host. */
+		#define DFU_REQ_UPLOAD           0x02
+
+		/** DFU class command request to get the current DFU status and state from the bootloader. */
+		#define DFU_REQ_GETSTATUS        0x03
+
+		/** DFU class command request to reset the current DFU status and state variables to their defaults. */
+		#define DFU_REQ_CLRSTATUS        0x04
+
+		/** DFU class command request to get the current DFU state of the bootloader. */
+		#define DFU_REQ_GETSTATE         0x05
+
+		/** DFU class command request to abort the current multi-request transfer and return to the dfuIDLE state. */
+		#define DFU_REQ_ABORT            0x06
+
+		/** DFU command to begin programming the device's memory. */
+		#define COMMAND_PROG_START       0x01
+
+		/** DFU command to begin reading the device's memory. */
+		#define COMMAND_DISP_DATA        0x03
+
+		/** DFU command to issue a write command. */
+		#define COMMAND_WRITE            0x04
+
+		/** DFU command to issue a read command. */
+		#define COMMAND_READ             0x05
+
+		/** DFU command to issue a memory base address change command, to set the current 64KB flash page
+		 *  that subsequent flash operations should use. */
+		#define COMMAND_CHANGE_BASE_ADDR 0x06
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a non-returning function pointer to the loaded application. */
+		typedef void (*AppPtr_t)(void) ATTR_NO_RETURN;
+
+		/** Type define for a structure containing a complete DFU command issued by the host. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Command; /**< Single byte command to perform, one of the \c COMMAND_* macro values */
+			uint8_t  Data[5]; /**< Command parameters */
+			uint16_t DataSize; /**< Size of the command parameters */
+		} DFU_Command_t;
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** DFU bootloader states. Refer to the DFU class specification for information on each state. */
+		enum DFU_State_t
+		{
+			appIDLE                      = 0,
+			appDETACH                    = 1,
+			dfuIDLE                      = 2,
+			dfuDNLOAD_SYNC               = 3,
+			dfuDNBUSY                    = 4,
+			dfuDNLOAD_IDLE               = 5,
+			dfuMANIFEST_SYNC             = 6,
+			dfuMANIFEST                  = 7,
+			dfuMANIFEST_WAIT_RESET       = 8,
+			dfuUPLOAD_IDLE               = 9,
+			dfuERROR                     = 10
+		};
+
+		/** DFU command status error codes. Refer to the DFU class specification for information on each error code. */
+		enum DFU_Status_t
+		{
+			OK                           = 0,
+			errTARGET                    = 1,
+			errFILE                      = 2,
+			errWRITE                     = 3,
+			errERASE                     = 4,
+			errCHECK_ERASED              = 5,
+			errPROG                      = 6,
+			errVERIFY                    = 7,
+			errADDRESS                   = 8,
+			errNOTDONE                   = 9,
+			errFIRMWARE                  = 10,
+			errVENDOR                    = 11,
+			errUSBR                      = 12,
+			errPOR                       = 13,
+			errUNKNOWN                   = 14,
+			errSTALLEDPKT                = 15
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		static void SetupHardware(void);
+		static void ResetHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_C)
+			static void DiscardFillerBytes(uint8_t NumberOfBytes);
+			static void ProcessBootloaderCommand(void);
+			static void LoadStartEndAddresses(void);
+			static void ProcessMemProgCommand(void);
+			static void ProcessMemReadCommand(void);
+			static void ProcessWriteCommand(void);
+			static void ProcessReadCommand(void);
+		#endif
+
+		void Application_Jump_Check(void) ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b2540a5b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/BootloaderDFU.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,235 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage DFU Class USB AVR Bootloader
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) - <i>See \ref SSec_Aux_Space</i>
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2) - <i>See \ref SSec_Aux_Space</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device Firmware Update Class (DFU)</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>None</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>USBIF DFU Class Standard, Atmel USB Bootloader Datasheet</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *       Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  This bootloader enumerates to the host as a DFU Class device, allowing for DFU-compatible programming
+ *  software to load firmware onto the AVR.
+ *
+ *  Out of the box this bootloader builds for the AT90USB1287 with an 8KB bootloader section size, and will fit
+ *  into 4KB of bootloader space. If you wish to alter this size and/or change the AVR model, you will need to
+ *  edit the MCU, FLASH_SIZE_KB and BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB values in the accompanying makefile.
+ *
+ *  When the bootloader is running, the board's LED(s) will flash at regular intervals to distinguish the
+ *  bootloader from the normal user application.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Running Running the Bootloader
+ *
+ *  On the USB AVR8 devices, setting the \c HWBE device fuse will cause the bootloader to run if the \c HWB pin of
+ *  the AVR is grounded when the device is reset.
+ *
+ *  The are two behaviours of this bootloader, depending on the device's fuses:
+ *
+ *  <b>If the device's BOOTRST fuse is set</b>, the bootloader will run any time the system is reset from
+ *  the external reset pin, unless no valid user application has been loaded. To initiate the bootloader, the
+ *  device's external reset pin should be grounded momentarily.
+ *
+ *  <b>If the device's BOOTRST fuse is not set</b>, the bootloader will run only if initiated via a software
+ *  jump, or if the \c HWB pin was low during the last device reset (if the \c HWBE fuse is set).
+ *
+ *  For board specific exceptions to the above, see below.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_XPLAIN Atmel Xplain Board
+ *  Ground the USB AVR JTAG's \c TCK pin to ground when powering on the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the
+ *  \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_Leonardo Arduino Leonardo Board
+ *  Ground \c IO13 when powering the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the
+ *  \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation
+ *
+ *  This bootloader is designed to be compatible with Atmel's provided Windows DFU class drivers. You will need to
+ *  install Atmel's DFU drivers prior to using this bootloader on Windows platforms. If you are using a 64 bit Windows
+ *  OS, you will need to either disable the driver signing requirement (see online tutorials for details) or use a
+ *  digitally signed version of the official Atmel driver provided by a third party AVR user at
+ *  <a>http://www.avrfreaks.net/index.php?module=Freaks%20Academy&func=viewItem&item_id=2196&item_type=project</a>.
+ *
+ *  \note This device spoofs Atmel's DFU Bootloader USB VID and PID so that the Atmel DFU bootloader
+ *        drivers included with FLIP will work. If you do not wish to use Atmel's ID codes, please
+ *        manually change them in Descriptors.c and alter your driver's INF file accordingly.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application
+ *
+ *  This bootloader is compatible with Atmel's FLIP utility on Windows machines, and dfu-programmer on Linux machines.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_FLIP FLIP (Windows)
+ *
+ *  FLIP (Flexible In-System Programmer) is a utility written by Atmel, and distributed for free on the Atmel website.
+ *  The FLIP utility is designed to assist in the bootloader programming of a range of Atmel devices, through several
+ *  popular physical interfaces including USB. It is written in Java, however makes use of native extensions for USB
+ *  support and thus is only offered on Windows.
+ *
+ *  To program a device using FLIP, refer to the Atmel FLIP documentation.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_DFUProgrammer dfu-programmer (Linux)
+ *
+ *  dfu-programmer is an open-source command line solution for the bootloader programming of Atmel devices through a
+ *  USB connection, using the DFU protocol, available for download at <a>http://sourceforge.net/projects/dfu-programmer/</a>.
+ *
+ *  The following example loads a HEX file into the AVR's FLASH memory using dfu-programmer:
+ *  \code
+ *  dfu-programmer at90usb1287 erase flash Mouse.hex
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_API User Application API
+ *
+ *  Several user application functions for FLASH and other special memory area manipulations are exposed by the bootloader,
+ *  allowing the user application to call into the bootloader at runtime to read and write FLASH data.
+ *
+ *  \warning The APIs exposed by the DFU class bootloader are \b NOT compatible with the API exposed by the official Atmel DFU bootloader.
+ *
+ *  By default, the bootloader API jump table is located 32 bytes from the end of the device's FLASH memory, and follows the
+ *  following layout:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE          32
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START         ((FLASHEND + 1UL) - BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE)
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(Index)         (void*)((BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (Index * 2)) / 2)
+ *
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_ErasePage)(uint32_t Address)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(0);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_WritePage)(uint32_t Address)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(1);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_FillWord)(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Word) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(2);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature)(uint16_t Address)           = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(3);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse)(uint16_t Address)                = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(4);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadLock)(void)                            = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(5);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_WriteLock)(uint8_t LockBits)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(6);
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START   (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 2))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE         0xDCFB
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START   (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 4))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_DFU_SIGNATURE           0xDF10
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START           (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 8))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_LENGTH          4
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  From the application the API support of the bootloader can be detected by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address
+ *  \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them to the value \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE. The class of bootloader
+ *  can be determined by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address \c BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them
+ *  to the value \c BOOTLOADER_DFU_SIGNATURE. The start address of the bootloader can be retrieved by reading the bytes of FLASH
+ *  memory starting from address \c BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_API_MemLayout Device Memory Map
+ *  The following illustration indicates the final memory map of the device when loaded with the bootloader.
+ *
+ *  \verbatim
+ *  +----------------------------+ 0x0000
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |      User Application      |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_AUX_SECTION_SIZE
+ *  | Booloader Start Trampoline |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - (BOOT_AUX_SECTION_SIZE - 4)
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |     Auxillery Bootloader   |
+ *  |  Space for Smaller Devices |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |   Bootloader Application   |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 96
+ *  |   API Table Trampolines    |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 32
+ *  |    Bootloader API Table    |
+ *  |   (User App. Accessible)   |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 8
+ *  |   Bootloader ID Constants  |
+ *  |   (User App. Accessible)   |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND
+ *  \endverbatim
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_Aux_Space Auxiliary Bootloader Section
+ *  To make the bootloader function on smaller devices (those with a physical
+ *  bootloader section of smaller than 6KB)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues:
+ *
+ *  \par On Linux machines, the DFU bootloader is inaccessible.
+ *  On many Linux systems, non-root users do not have automatic access to newly
+ *  inserted DFU devices. Root privileges or a UDEV rule is required to gain
+ *  access.
+ *  See <a href=https://groups.google.com/d/msg/lufa-support/CP9cy2bc8yo/kBqsOu-RBeMJ>here</a> for resolution steps.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>SECURE_MODE</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>If defined to \c true, the bootloader will not accept any memory commands other than a chip erase on start-up, until an
+ *        erase has been performed. This can be used in conjunction with the AVR's lockbits to prevent the AVRs firmware from
+ *        being dumped by unauthorized persons. When false, all memory operations are allowed at any time.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/AppConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3acf33c7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define SECURE_MODE              false
+
+#endif
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..59ae519e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      32
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6b7b6d490
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,185 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = PRODUCT_ID_CODE,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,0),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.DFU_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_DFU,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 0,
+
+			.Class                  = 0xFE,
+			.SubClass               = 0x01,
+			.Protocol               = 0x02,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.DFU_Functional =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_DFU_Functional_t), .Type = DTYPE_DFUFunctional},
+
+			.Attributes             = (ATTR_CAN_UPLOAD | ATTR_CAN_DOWNLOAD),
+
+			.DetachTimeout          = 0x0000,
+			.TransferSize           = 0x0C00,
+
+			.DFUSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0)
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"QMK");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"KB");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint16_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Language)
+			{
+				Address = &LanguageString;
+				Size    = LanguageString.Header.Size;
+			}
+			else if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Manufacturer)
+			{
+				Address = &ManufacturerString;
+				Size    = ManufacturerString.Header.Size;
+			}
+			else if (DescriptorNumber == STRING_ID_Product)
+			{
+				Address = &ProductString;
+				Size    = ProductString.Header.Size;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5487f88f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Descriptor type value for a DFU class functional descriptor. */
+		#define DTYPE_DFUFunctional               0x21
+
+		/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device will detach and re-attach when a DFU_DETACH
+		 *  command is issued, rather than the host issuing a USB Reset.
+		 */
+		#define ATTR_WILL_DETATCH                 (1 << 3)
+
+		/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can communicate during the manifestation phase
+		 *  (memory programming phase).
+		 */
+		#define ATTR_MANEFESTATION_TOLLERANT      (1 << 2)
+
+		/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can accept DFU_UPLOAD requests to send data from
+		 *  the device to the host.
+		 */
+		#define ATTR_CAN_UPLOAD                   (1 << 1)
+
+		/** DFU attribute mask, indicating that the DFU device can accept DFU_DNLOAD requests to send data from
+		 *  the host to the device.
+		 */
+		#define ATTR_CAN_DOWNLOAD                 (1 << 0)
+
+		#if defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FFB
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x97
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF9
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x96
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FFB
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x97
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF9
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x96
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U4__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF4
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x95
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x87
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U4__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF3
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x88
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega32U2__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF0
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x95
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x8A
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega16U2__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FEF
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x89
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB162__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FFA
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x94
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#elif defined(__AVR_ATmega8U2__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FEE
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x93
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x89
+		#elif defined(__AVR_AT90USB82__)
+			#define PRODUCT_ID_CODE               0x2FF7
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_1               0x1E
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_2               0x93
+			#define AVR_SIGNATURE_3               0x82
+		#else
+			#error The selected AVR part is not currently supported by this bootloader.
+		#endif
+
+		#if !defined(PRODUCT_ID_CODE)
+			#error Current AVR model is not supported by this bootloader.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a DFU class function descriptor. This descriptor gives DFU class information
+		 *  to the host when read, indicating the DFU device's capabilities.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Standard descriptor header structure */
+
+			uint8_t                 Attributes; /**< DFU device attributes, a mask comprising of the
+			                                     *  ATTR_* macros listed in this source file
+			                                     */
+			uint16_t                DetachTimeout; /**< Timeout in milliseconds between a USB_DETACH
+			                                        *  command being issued and the device detaching
+			                                        *  from the USB bus
+			                                        */
+			uint16_t                TransferSize; /**< Maximum number of bytes the DFU device can accept
+			                                       *  from the host in a transaction
+			                                       */
+			uint16_t                DFUSpecification; /**< BCD packed DFU specification number this DFU
+			                                           *  device complies with
+			                                           */
+		} USB_Descriptor_DFU_Functional_t;
+
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// DFU Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            DFU_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_DFU_Functional_t       DFU_Functional;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_DFU = 0, /**< DFU interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint16_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f56aba69f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+	<project caption="DFU Bootloader - 128KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu.avr8.128_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_dfu_128kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.dfu"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1F000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1F000"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FFA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FFE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FFF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="DFU Bootloader - 64KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu.avr8.64_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_dfu_64kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.dfu"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="at90usb647"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0xF000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0xF000"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0xFFA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0xFFE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0xFFF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="DFU Bootloader - 32KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu.avr8.32_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_dfu_32kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.dfu"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x7000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x7000"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x7FA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x7FE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x7FF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="DFU Bootloader - 16KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu.avr8.16_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_dfu_16kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.dfu"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="atmega16u2"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x3000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x3000"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x3FA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x3FE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x3FF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="DFU Bootloader - 8KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu.avr8.8_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_dfu_8kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.dfu"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="atmega8u2"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1000"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<module type="application" id="lufa.bootloaders.dfu" caption="DFU Bootloader">
+		<info type="description" value="summary">
+		DFU Class Bootloader, capable of reprogramming a device using the Atmel FLIP or other AVR DFU programming software when plugged into a host.
+		</info>
+
+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+			<keyword value="Bootloaders"/>
+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>
+		</info>
+
+ 		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+		<build type="include-path" value="."/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderDFU.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderDFU.h"/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderAPI.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderAPI.h"/>
+		<build type="asm-source" value="BootloaderAPITable.S"/>
+
+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>
+
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="BootloaderDFU.txt"/>
+
+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+	</module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cbb03d6fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2396 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.9
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - DFU Class Bootloader"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included
+# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55
+# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy
+# the logo to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new
+# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part
+# of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or
+# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO,
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option
+# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will
+# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to
+# YES the compound reference will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo
+# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test
+# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete
+# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty,
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated
+# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated
+# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty
+# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred
+# to HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created
+# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen
+# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code
+# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_SOURCE_CODE        = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an
+# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the
+# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is
+# still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM \
+                         ATTR_NO_INIT
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in
+# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by
+# the !include statement in a plantuml block.
+
+PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH  =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0d2014015
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/DFU/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = atmega32u4
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = QMK
+F_CPU        = 16000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = BootloaderDFU
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c BootloaderAPI.c BootloaderAPITable.S $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET)
+LD_FLAGS     = -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) $(BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS)
+
+# Flash size and bootloader section sizes of the target, in KB. These must
+# match the target's total FLASH size and the bootloader size set in the
+# device's fuses.
+FLASH_SIZE_KB         = 32
+BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB  = 4
+
+# Bootloader address calculation formulas
+# Do not modify these macros, but rather modify the dependent values above.
+CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX   = $(shell printf "0x%X" $$(( $(1) )) )
+BOOT_START_OFFSET     = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 )
+BOOT_SEC_OFFSET       = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) * 1024) - ($(strip $(1))) )
+
+# Bootloader linker section flags for relocating the API table sections to
+# known FLASH addresses - these should not normally be user-edited.
+BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG  = -Wl,--section-start=$(strip $(1))=$(call BOOT_SEC_OFFSET, $(3)) -Wl,--undefined=$(strip $(2))
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS     = $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_trampolines, BootloaderAPI_Trampolines, 96)
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS    += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_jumptable,   BootloaderAPI_JumpTable,   32)
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS    += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_signatures,  BootloaderAPI_Signatures,  8)
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules
+DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA
+include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk
+include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk
+
+# Include common DMBS build system modules
+DMBS_PATH      ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fa1dd5873
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.c
@@ -0,0 +1,198 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the HID class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
+ */
+
+#include "BootloaderHID.h"
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
+ *  via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application
+ *  started via a forced watchdog reset.
+ */
+static bool RunBootloader = true;
+
+/** Magic lock for forced application start. If the HWBE fuse is programmed and BOOTRST is unprogrammed, the bootloader
+ *  will start if the /HWB line of the AVR is held low and the system is reset. However, if the /HWB line is still held
+ *  low when the application attempts to start via a watchdog reset, the bootloader will re-start. If set to the value
+ *  \ref MAGIC_BOOT_KEY the special init function \ref Application_Jump_Check() will force the application to start.
+ */
+uint16_t MagicBootKey ATTR_NO_INIT;
+
+
+/** Special startup routine to check if the bootloader was started via a watchdog reset, and if the magic application
+ *  start key has been loaded into \ref MagicBootKey. If the bootloader started via the watchdog and the key is valid,
+ *  this will force the user application to start via a software jump.
+ */
+void Application_Jump_Check(void)
+{
+	/* If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application */
+	if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
+	{
+		/* Turn off the watchdog */
+		MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+		wdt_disable();
+
+		/* Clear the boot key and jump to the user application */
+		MagicBootKey = 0;
+
+		// cppcheck-suppress constStatement
+		((void (*)(void))0x0000)();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the bootloader, then continuously
+ *  runs the bootloader processing routine until instructed to soft-exit.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	/* Setup hardware required for the bootloader */
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Enable global interrupts so that the USB stack can function */
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	while (RunBootloader)
+	  USB_USBTask();
+
+	/* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */
+	USB_Detach();
+
+	/* Unlock the forced application start mode of the bootloader if it is restarted */
+	MagicBootKey = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY;
+
+	/* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */
+	wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
+
+	for (;;);
+}
+
+/** Configures all hardware required for the bootloader. */
+static void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
+
+	/* Initialize USB subsystem */
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This configures the device's endpoints ready
+ *  to relay data to and from the attached USB host.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	/* Setup HID Report Endpoint */
+	Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(HID_IN_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, HID_IN_EPSIZE, 1);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	/* Ignore any requests that aren't directed to the HID interface */
+	if ((USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType & (CONTROL_REQTYPE_TYPE | CONTROL_REQTYPE_RECIPIENT)) !=
+	    (REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+	{
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Process HID specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case HID_REQ_SetReport:
+			Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+			/* Wait until the command has been sent by the host */
+			while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()));
+
+			/* Read in the write destination address */
+			#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+			uint32_t PageAddress = ((uint32_t)Endpoint_Read_16_LE() << 8);
+			#else
+			uint16_t PageAddress = Endpoint_Read_16_LE();
+			#endif
+
+			/* Check if the command is a program page command, or a start application command */
+			#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+			if ((uint16_t)(PageAddress >> 8) == COMMAND_STARTAPPLICATION)
+			#else
+			if (PageAddress == COMMAND_STARTAPPLICATION)
+			#endif
+			{
+				RunBootloader = false;
+			}
+			else if (PageAddress < BOOT_START_ADDR)
+			{
+				/* Erase the given FLASH page, ready to be programmed */
+				boot_page_erase(PageAddress);
+				boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+				/* Write each of the FLASH page's bytes in sequence */
+				for (uint8_t PageWord = 0; PageWord < (SPM_PAGESIZE / 2); PageWord++)
+				{
+					/* Check if endpoint is empty - if so clear it and wait until ready for next packet */
+					if (!(Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint()))
+					{
+						Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+						while (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()));
+					}
+
+					/* Write the next data word to the FLASH page */
+					boot_page_fill(PageAddress + ((uint16_t)PageWord << 1), Endpoint_Read_16_LE());
+				}
+
+				/* Write the filled FLASH page to memory */
+				boot_page_write(PageAddress);
+				boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+				/* Re-enable RWW section */
+				boot_rww_enable();
+			}
+
+			Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+			Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..62ee07de3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.h
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderHID.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADERHID_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADERHID_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__OPTIMIZE_SIZE__)
+			#error This bootloader requires that it be optimized for size, not speed, to fit into the target device. Change optimization settings and try again.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Bootloader special address to start the user application */
+		#define COMMAND_STARTAPPLICATION   0xFFFF
+
+		/** Magic bootloader key to unlock forced application start mode. */
+		#define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY             0xDC42
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		static void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void Application_Jump_Check(void) ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.txt b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e340703c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/BootloaderHID.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage HID Class USB AVR Bootloader
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Human Interface Device Class (HID)</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>USBIF HID Class Standard \n
+ *       Teensy Programming Protocol Specification</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *       Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  This bootloader enumerates to the host as a HID Class device, allowing for device FLASH programming through
+ *  the supplied command line software, which is a modified version of Paul's TeensyHID Command Line loader code
+ *  from PJRC (used with permission). This bootloader is deliberately non-compatible with the proprietary PJRC
+ *  HalfKay bootloader GUI; only the command line interface software accompanying this bootloader will work with it.
+ *
+ *  Out of the box this bootloader builds for the AT90USB1287 with an 8KB bootloader section size, and will fit
+ *  into 2KB of bootloader space for the Series 2 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU2, AT90USBxx2) or 4KB of bootloader space for
+ *  all other models. If you wish to alter this size and/or change the AVR model, you will need to edit the MCU,
+ *  FLASH_SIZE_KB and BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB values in the accompanying makefile.
+ *
+ *  \warning <b>THIS BOOTLOADER IS NOT SECURE.</b> Malicious entities can recover written data, even if the device
+ *           lockbits are set.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Running Running the Bootloader
+ *
+ *  This bootloader is designed to be started via the \c HWB mechanism of the USB AVRs; ground the \c HWB pin (see device
+ *  datasheet) then momentarily ground \c /RESET to start the bootloader. This assumes the \c HWBE fuse is set and the
+ *  \c BOOTRST fuse is cleared.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation
+ *
+ *  This bootloader uses the HID class driver inbuilt into all modern operating systems, thus no additional drivers
+ *  need to be supplied for correct operation.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application
+ *
+ *  Due to licensing issues, the supplied bootloader is compatible with the HalfKay bootloader protocol designed
+ *  by PJRC, but is <b>not compatible with the cross-platform loader GUI</b>. A modified version of the open source
+ *  cross-platform TeensyLoader application is supplied, which can be compiled under most operating systems. The
+ *  command-line loader application should remain compatible with genuine Teensy boards in addition to boards using
+ *  this custom bootloader.
+ *
+ *  Once compiled, programs can be loaded into the AVR's FLASH memory through the following example command:
+ *  \code
+ *  hid_bootloader_cli -mmcu=at90usb1287 Mouse.hex
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues:
+ *
+ *  \par After loading an application, it is not run automatically on startup.
+ *  Some USB AVR boards ship with the \c BOOTRST fuse set, causing the bootloader
+ *  to run automatically when the device is reset. This booloader requires the
+ *  \c BOOTRST be disabled and the HWBE fuse used instead to run the bootloader
+ *  when needed.
+ *
+ *  \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5aa0e765b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..854ae1b63
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t HIDReport[] =
+{
+	HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(16, 0xFFDC), /* Vendor Page 0xDC */
+	HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xFB), /* Vendor Usage 0xFB */
+	HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01), /* Vendor Usage 1 */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x02), /* Vendor Usage 2 */
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0x00),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 0xFF),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x08),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(16, (sizeof(uint16_t) + SPM_PAGESIZE)),
+		HID_RI_OUTPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_ABSOLUTE | HID_IOF_NON_VOLATILE),
+	HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2067,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_GenericHID,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_VendorHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(HIDReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = HID_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = HID_IN_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint16_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	/* If/Else If chain compiles slightly smaller than a switch case */
+	if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Device)
+	{
+		Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+		Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+	}
+	else if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Configuration)
+	{
+		Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+		Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+	}
+	else if (DescriptorType == HID_DTYPE_HID)
+	{
+		Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_VendorHID;
+		Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+	}
+	else if (DescriptorType == HID_DTYPE_Report)
+	{
+		Address = &HIDReport;
+		Size    = sizeof(HIDReport);
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5516b1635
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Generic HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_VendorHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_GenericHID = 0, /**< GenericHID interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the HID data IN endpoint. */
+		#define HID_IN_EPADDR                (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define HID_IN_EPSIZE                64
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint16_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/.gitignore b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/.gitignore
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4e73d1ec5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/.gitignore
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+hid_bootloader_cli
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d7d6458a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+OS ?= LINUX
+#OS ?= WINDOWS
+#OS ?= MACOSX
+#OS ?= BSD
+
+ifeq ($(OS), LINUX)  # also works on FreeBSD
+CC ?= gcc
+CFLAGS ?= -O2 -Wall
+hid_bootloader_cli: hid_bootloader_cli.c
+	$(CC) $(CFLAGS) -s -DUSE_LIBUSB -o hid_bootloader_cli hid_bootloader_cli.c -lusb
+
+
+else ifeq ($(OS), WINDOWS)
+CC = i586-mingw32msvc-gcc
+CFLAGS ?= -O2 -Wall
+LDLIB = -lsetupapi -lhid
+hid_bootloader_cli.exe: hid_bootloader_cli.c
+	$(CC) $(CFLAGS) -s -DUSE_WIN32 -o hid_bootloader_cli.exe hid_bootloader_cli.c $(LDLIB)
+
+
+else ifeq ($(OS), MACOSX)
+CC ?= gcc
+SDK ?= /Developer/SDKs/MacOSX10.5.sdk
+CFLAGS ?= -O2 -Wall
+hid_bootloader_cli: hid_bootloader_cli.c
+	$(CC) $(CFLAGS) -DUSE_APPLE_IOKIT -isysroot $(SDK) -o hid_bootloader_cli hid_bootloader_cli.c -Wl,-syslibroot,$(SDK) -framework IOKit -framework CoreFoundation
+
+
+else ifeq ($(OS), BSD)  # works on NetBSD and OpenBSD
+CC ?= gcct
+CFLAGS ?= -O2 -Wall
+hid_bootloader_cli: hid_bootloader_cli.c
+	$(CC) $(CFLAGS) -s -DUSE_UHID -o hid_bootloader_cli hid_bootloader_cli.c
+
+
+endif
+
+
+clean:
+	rm -f hid_bootloader_cli hid_bootloader_cli.exe
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile.bsd b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile.bsd
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a15a66405
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/Makefile.bsd
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+OS ?= FreeBSD
+#OS ?= NetBSD
+#OS ?= OpenBSD
+
+CFLAGS ?= -O2 -Wall
+CC ?= gcc
+
+.if $(OS) == "FreeBSD"
+CFLAGS += -DUSE_LIBUSB
+LIBS =  -lusb
+.elif $(OS) == "NetBSD" || $(OS) == "OpenBSD"
+CFLAGS += -DUSE_UHID
+LIBS =
+.endif
+
+
+hid_bootloader_cli: hid_bootloader_cli.c
+	$(CC) $(CFLAGS) -s -o hid_bootloader_cli hid_bootloader_cli.c $(LIBS)
+
+clean:
+	rm -f hid_bootloader_cli
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/gpl3.txt b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/gpl3.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..94a9ed024
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/gpl3.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,674 @@
+                    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+                       Version 3, 29 June 2007
+
+ Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+                            Preamble
+
+  The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for
+software and other kinds of works.
+
+  The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed
+to take away your freedom to share and change the works.  By contrast,
+the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to
+share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free
+software for all its users.  We, the Free Software Foundation, use the
+GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to
+any other work released this way by its authors.  You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you
+want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
+free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you
+these rights or asking you to surrender the rights.  Therefore, you have
+certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if
+you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same
+freedoms that you received.  You must make sure that they, too, receive
+or can get the source code.  And you must show them these terms so they
+know their rights.
+
+  Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps:
+(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License
+giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
+
+  For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains
+that there is no warranty for this free software.  For both users' and
+authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as
+changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to
+authors of previous versions.
+
+  Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run
+modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer
+can do so.  This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of
+protecting users' freedom to change the software.  The systematic
+pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to
+use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable.  Therefore, we
+have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those
+products.  If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we
+stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions
+of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.
+
+  Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents.
+States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of
+software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to
+avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could
+make it effectively proprietary.  To prevent this, the GPL assures that
+patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+                       TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+  0. Definitions.
+
+  "This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
+
+  "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of
+works, such as semiconductor masks.
+
+  "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this
+License.  Each licensee is addressed as "you".  "Licensees" and
+"recipients" may be individuals or organizations.
+
+  To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work
+in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an
+exact copy.  The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the
+earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work.
+
+  A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based
+on the Program.
+
+  To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without
+permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for
+infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a
+computer or modifying a private copy.  Propagation includes copying,
+distribution (with or without modification), making available to the
+public, and in some countries other activities as well.
+
+  To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other
+parties to make or receive copies.  Mere interaction with a user through
+a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
+
+  An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices"
+to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible
+feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2)
+tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the
+extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the
+work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License.  If
+the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a
+menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.
+
+  1. Source Code.
+
+  The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work
+for making modifications to it.  "Object code" means any non-source
+form of a work.
+
+  A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official
+standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of
+interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that
+is widely used among developers working in that language.
+
+  The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other
+than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of
+packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major
+Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that
+Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an
+implementation is available to the public in source code form.  A
+"Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component
+(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system
+(if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to
+produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
+
+  The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all
+the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable
+work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to
+control those activities.  However, it does not include the work's
+System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free
+programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but
+which are not part of the work.  For example, Corresponding Source
+includes interface definition files associated with source files for
+the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically
+linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require,
+such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those
+subprograms and other parts of the work.
+
+  The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users
+can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding
+Source.
+
+  The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that
+same work.
+
+  2. Basic Permissions.
+
+  All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of
+copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated
+conditions are met.  This License explicitly affirms your unlimited
+permission to run the unmodified Program.  The output from running a
+covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its
+content, constitutes a covered work.  This License acknowledges your
+rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.
+
+  You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not
+convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains
+in force.  You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose
+of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you
+with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with
+the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do
+not control copyright.  Those thus making or running the covered works
+for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction
+and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of
+your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
+
+  Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under
+the conditions stated below.  Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10
+makes it unnecessary.
+
+  3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
+
+  No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological
+measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article
+11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or
+similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such
+measures.
+
+  When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid
+circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention
+is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to
+the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or
+modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's
+users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of
+technological measures.
+
+  4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
+
+  You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you
+receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
+appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice;
+keep intact all notices stating that this License and any
+non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code;
+keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all
+recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
+
+  You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,
+and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
+
+  5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
+
+  You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to
+produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the
+terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+    a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified
+    it, and giving a relevant date.
+
+    b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is
+    released under this License and any conditions added under section
+    7.  This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to
+    "keep intact all notices".
+
+    c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this
+    License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy.  This
+    License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7
+    additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts,
+    regardless of how they are packaged.  This License gives no
+    permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not
+    invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
+
+    d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display
+    Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive
+    interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your
+    work need not make them do so.
+
+  A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent
+works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work,
+and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program,
+in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an
+"aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not
+used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users
+beyond what the individual works permit.  Inclusion of a covered work
+in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other
+parts of the aggregate.
+
+  6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
+
+  You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms
+of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
+machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License,
+in one of these ways:
+
+    a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
+    (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the
+    Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium
+    customarily used for software interchange.
+
+    b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
+    (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a
+    written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as
+    long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product
+    model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a
+    copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the
+    product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical
+    medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no
+    more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this
+    conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the
+    Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
+
+    c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the
+    written offer to provide the Corresponding Source.  This
+    alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and
+    only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord
+    with subsection 6b.
+
+    d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated
+    place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the
+    Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no
+    further charge.  You need not require recipients to copy the
+    Corresponding Source along with the object code.  If the place to
+    copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source
+    may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party)
+    that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain
+    clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the
+    Corresponding Source.  Regardless of what server hosts the
+    Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is
+    available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
+
+    e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided
+    you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding
+    Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no
+    charge under subsection 6d.
+
+  A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded
+from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be
+included in conveying the object code work.
+
+  A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any
+tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family,
+or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation
+into a dwelling.  In determining whether a product is a consumer product,
+doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage.  For a particular
+product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a
+typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status
+of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user
+actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product.  A product
+is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial
+commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent
+the only significant mode of use of the product.
+
+  "Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods,
+procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install
+and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from
+a modified version of its Corresponding Source.  The information must
+suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object
+code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because
+modification has been made.
+
+  If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or
+specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as
+part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the
+User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a
+fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the
+Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied
+by the Installation Information.  But this requirement does not apply
+if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install
+modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has
+been installed in ROM).
+
+  The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a
+requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates
+for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for
+the User Product in which it has been modified or installed.  Access to a
+network may be denied when the modification itself materially and
+adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and
+protocols for communication across the network.
+
+  Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided,
+in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly
+documented (and with an implementation available to the public in
+source code form), and must require no special password or key for
+unpacking, reading or copying.
+
+  7. Additional Terms.
+
+  "Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this
+License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions.
+Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall
+be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent
+that they are valid under applicable law.  If additional permissions
+apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately
+under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by
+this License without regard to the additional permissions.
+
+  When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option
+remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of
+it.  (Additional permissions may be written to require their own
+removal in certain cases when you modify the work.)  You may place
+additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work,
+for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
+
+  Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you
+add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of
+that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
+
+    a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the
+    terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
+
+    b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or
+    author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal
+    Notices displayed by works containing it; or
+
+    c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or
+    requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in
+    reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
+
+    d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or
+    authors of the material; or
+
+    e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some
+    trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
+
+    f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that
+    material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of
+    it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for
+    any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on
+    those licensors and authors.
+
+  All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further
+restrictions" within the meaning of section 10.  If the Program as you
+received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is
+governed by this License along with a term that is a further
+restriction, you may remove that term.  If a license document contains
+a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this
+License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms
+of that license document, provided that the further restriction does
+not survive such relicensing or conveying.
+
+  If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you
+must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the
+additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating
+where to find the applicable terms.
+
+  Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the
+form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions;
+the above requirements apply either way.
+
+  8. Termination.
+
+  You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly
+provided under this License.  Any attempt otherwise to propagate or
+modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under
+this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third
+paragraph of section 11).
+
+  However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
+license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
+provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
+finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright
+holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means
+prior to 60 days after the cessation.
+
+  Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
+reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
+violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
+received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that
+copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after
+your receipt of the notice.
+
+  Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
+licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under
+this License.  If your rights have been terminated and not permanently
+reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same
+material under section 10.
+
+  9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
+
+  You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or
+run a copy of the Program.  Ancillary propagation of a covered work
+occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission
+to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance.  However,
+nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or
+modify any covered work.  These actions infringe copyright if you do
+not accept this License.  Therefore, by modifying or propagating a
+covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.
+
+  10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
+
+  Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically
+receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and
+propagate that work, subject to this License.  You are not responsible
+for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
+
+  An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an
+organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an
+organization, or merging organizations.  If propagation of a covered
+work results from an entity transaction, each party to that
+transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever
+licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could
+give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the
+Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if
+the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
+
+  You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the
+rights granted or affirmed under this License.  For example, you may
+not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of
+rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation
+(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that
+any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for
+sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
+
+  11. Patents.
+
+  A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this
+License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based.  The
+work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version".
+
+  A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims
+owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or
+hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted
+by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version,
+but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a
+consequence of further modification of the contributor version.  For
+purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant
+patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of
+this License.
+
+  Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free
+patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to
+make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and
+propagate the contents of its contributor version.
+
+  In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express
+agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent
+(such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to
+sue for patent infringement).  To "grant" such a patent license to a
+party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a
+patent against the party.
+
+  If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license,
+and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone
+to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a
+publicly available network server or other readily accessible means,
+then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so
+available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the
+patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner
+consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent
+license to downstream recipients.  "Knowingly relying" means you have
+actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the
+covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work
+in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that
+country that you have reason to believe are valid.
+
+  If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or
+arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a
+covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties
+receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify
+or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license
+you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered
+work and works based on it.
+
+  A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within
+the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is
+conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are
+specifically granted under this License.  You may not convey a covered
+work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is
+in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment
+to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying
+the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the
+parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory
+patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work
+conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily
+for and in connection with specific products or compilations that
+contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement,
+or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
+
+  Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting
+any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may
+otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
+
+  12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom.
+
+  If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot convey a
+covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
+not convey it at all.  For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you
+to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey
+the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this
+License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
+
+  13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
+
+  Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have
+permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed
+under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single
+combined work, and to convey the resulting work.  The terms of this
+License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work,
+but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License,
+section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the
+combination as such.
+
+  14. Revised Versions of this License.
+
+  The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of
+the GNU General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+  Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the
+Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General
+Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the
+option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered
+version or of any later version published by the Free Software
+Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of the
+GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published
+by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+  If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future
+versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's
+public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you
+to choose that version for the Program.
+
+  Later license versions may give you additional or different
+permissions.  However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
+author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a
+later version.
+
+  15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
+
+  THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
+APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
+HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
+OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
+THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM
+IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF
+ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+  16. Limitation of Liability.
+
+  IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS
+THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
+GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
+USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
+DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD
+PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
+EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+  17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
+
+  If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided
+above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
+reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates
+an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the
+Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a
+copy of the Program in return for a fee.
+
+                     END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+            How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+    <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+    Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+
+    This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
+    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+    the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
+    (at your option) any later version.
+
+    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+    GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+    along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+  If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short
+notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+    <program>  Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+    This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+    This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+    under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License.  Of course, your program's commands
+might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box".
+
+  You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school,
+if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary.
+For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see
+<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+  The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program
+into proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you
+may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with
+the library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
+Public License instead of this License.  But first, please read
+<http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>.
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/hid_bootloader_cli.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/hid_bootloader_cli.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b54f943b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp/hid_bootloader_cli.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1013 @@
+/* Modified for the LUFA HID Bootloader by Dean Camera
+ *           http://www.lufa-lib.org
+ *
+ *   THIS MODIFIED VERSION IS UNSUPPORTED BY PJRC.
+ */
+
+/* Teensy Loader, Command Line Interface
+ * Program and Reboot Teensy Board with HalfKay Bootloader
+ * http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/loader_cli.html
+ * Copyright 2008-2010, PJRC.COM, LLC
+ *
+ *
+ * You may redistribute this program and/or modify it under the terms
+ * of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+ * Foundation, version 3 of the License.
+ *
+ * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+ * GNU General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ * along with this program.  If not, see http://www.gnu.org/licenses/
+ */
+
+/* Want to incorporate this code into a proprietary application??
+ * Just email paul@pjrc.com to ask.  Usually it's not a problem,
+ * but you do need to ask to use this code in any way other than
+ * those permitted by the GNU General Public License, version 3  */
+
+/* For non-root permissions on ubuntu or similar udev-based linux
+ * http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/49-teensy.rules
+ */
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+
+void usage(void)
+{
+	fprintf(stderr, "Usage: hid_bootloader_cli -mmcu=<MCU> [-w] [-h] [-n] [-v] <file.hex>\n");
+	fprintf(stderr, "\t-w : Wait for device to appear\n");
+	fprintf(stderr, "\t-r : Use hard reboot if device not online\n");
+	fprintf(stderr, "\t-n : No reboot after programming\n");
+	fprintf(stderr, "\t-v : Verbose output\n");
+	fprintf(stderr, "\n<MCU> = atmegaXXuY or at90usbXXXY");
+
+	fprintf(stderr, "\nFor support and more information, please visit:\n");
+	fprintf(stderr, "http://www.lufa-lib.org\n");
+
+	fprintf(stderr, "\nBased on the TeensyHID command line programmer software:\n");
+	fprintf(stderr, "http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/loader_cli.html\n");
+	exit(1);
+}
+
+// USB Access Functions
+int teensy_open(void);
+int teensy_write(void *buf, int len, double timeout);
+void teensy_close(void);
+int hard_reboot(void);
+
+// Intel Hex File Functions
+int read_intel_hex(const char *filename);
+int ihex_bytes_within_range(int begin, int end);
+void ihex_get_data(int addr, int len, unsigned char *bytes);
+
+// Misc stuff
+int printf_verbose(const char *format, ...);
+void delay(double seconds);
+void die(const char *str, ...);
+void parse_options(int argc, char **argv);
+
+// options (from user via command line args)
+int wait_for_device_to_appear = 0;
+int hard_reboot_device = 0;
+int reboot_after_programming = 1;
+int verbose = 0;
+int code_size = 0, block_size = 0;
+const char *filename=NULL;
+
+
+/****************************************************************/
+/*                                                              */
+/*                       Main Program                           */
+/*                                                              */
+/****************************************************************/
+
+int main(int argc, char **argv)
+{
+	unsigned char buf[260];
+	int num, addr, r, first_block=1, waited=0;
+
+	// parse command line arguments
+	parse_options(argc, argv);
+	if (!filename) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "Filename must be specified\n\n");
+		usage();
+	}
+	if (!code_size) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "MCU type must be specified\n\n");
+		usage();
+	}
+	printf_verbose("Teensy Loader, Command Line, Version 2.0\n");
+
+	// read the intel hex file
+	// this is done first so any error is reported before using USB
+	num = read_intel_hex(filename);
+	if (num < 0) die("error reading intel hex file \"%s\"", filename);
+	printf_verbose("Read \"%s\": %d bytes, %.1f%% usage\n",
+		filename, num, (double)num / (double)code_size * 100.0);
+
+	// open the USB device
+	while (1) {
+		if (teensy_open()) break;
+		if (hard_reboot_device) {
+			if (!hard_reboot()) die("Unable to find rebootor\n");
+			printf_verbose("Hard Reboot performed\n");
+			hard_reboot_device = 0; // only hard reboot once
+			wait_for_device_to_appear = 1;
+		}
+		if (!wait_for_device_to_appear) die("Unable to open device\n");
+		if (!waited) {
+			printf_verbose("Waiting for Teensy device...\n");
+			printf_verbose(" (hint: press the reset button)\n");
+			waited = 1;
+		}
+		delay(0.25);
+	}
+	printf_verbose("Found HalfKay Bootloader\n");
+
+	// if we waited for the device, read the hex file again
+	// perhaps it changed while we were waiting?
+	if (waited) {
+		num = read_intel_hex(filename);
+		if (num < 0) die("error reading intel hex file \"%s\"", filename);
+		printf_verbose("Read \"%s\": %d bytes, %.1f%% usage\n",
+		 	filename, num, (double)num / (double)code_size * 100.0);
+	}
+
+	// program the data
+	printf_verbose("Programming");
+	fflush(stdout);
+	for (addr = 0; addr < code_size; addr += block_size) {
+		if (addr > 0 && !ihex_bytes_within_range(addr, addr + block_size - 1)) {
+			// don't waste time on blocks that are unused,
+			// but always do the first one to erase the chip
+			continue;
+		}
+		printf_verbose(".");
+		if (code_size < 0x10000) {
+			buf[0] = addr & 255;
+			buf[1] = (addr >> 8) & 255;
+		} else {
+			buf[0] = (addr >> 8) & 255;
+			buf[1] = (addr >> 16) & 255;
+		}
+		ihex_get_data(addr, block_size, buf + 2);
+		r = teensy_write(buf, block_size + 2, first_block ? 3.0 : 0.25);
+		if (!r) die("error writing to Teensy\n");
+		first_block = 0;
+	}
+	printf_verbose("\n");
+
+	// reboot to the user's new code
+	if (reboot_after_programming) {
+		printf_verbose("Booting\n");
+		buf[0] = 0xFF;
+		buf[1] = 0xFF;
+		memset(buf + 2, 0, sizeof(buf) - 2);
+		teensy_write(buf, block_size + 2, 0.25);
+	}
+	teensy_close();
+	return 0;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/****************************************************************/
+/*                                                              */
+/*             USB Access - libusb (Linux & FreeBSD)            */
+/*                                                              */
+/****************************************************************/
+
+#if defined(USE_LIBUSB)
+
+// http://libusb.sourceforge.net/doc/index.html
+#include <usb.h>
+
+usb_dev_handle * open_usb_device(int vid, int pid)
+{
+	struct usb_bus *bus;
+	struct usb_device *dev;
+	usb_dev_handle *h;
+	#ifdef LIBUSB_HAS_GET_DRIVER_NP
+	char buf[128];
+	#endif
+	int r;
+
+	usb_init();
+	usb_find_busses();
+	usb_find_devices();
+	//printf_verbose("\nSearching for USB device:\n");
+	for (bus = usb_get_busses(); bus; bus = bus->next) {
+		for (dev = bus->devices; dev; dev = dev->next) {
+			//printf_verbose("bus \"%s\", device \"%s\" vid=%04X, pid=%04X\n",
+			//	bus->dirname, dev->filename,
+			//	dev->descriptor.idVendor,
+			//	dev->descriptor.idProduct
+			//);
+			if (dev->descriptor.idVendor != vid) continue;
+			if (dev->descriptor.idProduct != pid) continue;
+			h = usb_open(dev);
+			if (!h) {
+				printf_verbose("Found device but unable to open");
+				continue;
+			}
+			#ifdef LIBUSB_HAS_GET_DRIVER_NP
+			r = usb_get_driver_np(h, 0, buf, sizeof(buf));
+			if (r >= 0) {
+				r = usb_detach_kernel_driver_np(h, 0);
+				if (r < 0) {
+					usb_close(h);
+					printf_verbose("Device is in use by \"%s\" driver", buf);
+					continue;
+				}
+			}
+			#endif
+			// Mac OS-X - removing this call to usb_claim_interface() might allow
+			// this to work, even though it is a clear misuse of the libusb API.
+			// normally Apple's IOKit should be used on Mac OS-X
+			r = usb_claim_interface(h, 0);
+			if (r < 0) {
+				usb_close(h);
+				printf_verbose("Unable to claim interface, check USB permissions");
+				continue;
+			}
+			return h;
+		}
+	}
+	return NULL;
+}
+
+static usb_dev_handle *libusb_teensy_handle = NULL;
+
+int teensy_open(void)
+{
+	teensy_close();
+	libusb_teensy_handle = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0478);
+
+	if (!libusb_teensy_handle)
+		libusb_teensy_handle = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067);
+
+	if (!libusb_teensy_handle) return 0;
+	return 1;
+}
+
+int teensy_write(void *buf, int len, double timeout)
+{
+	int r;
+
+	if (!libusb_teensy_handle) return 0;
+	r = usb_control_msg(libusb_teensy_handle, 0x21, 9, 0x0200, 0, (char *)buf,
+		len, (int)(timeout * 1000.0));
+	if (r < 0) return 0;
+	return 1;
+}
+
+void teensy_close(void)
+{
+	if (!libusb_teensy_handle) return;
+	usb_release_interface(libusb_teensy_handle, 0);
+	usb_close(libusb_teensy_handle);
+	libusb_teensy_handle = NULL;
+}
+
+int hard_reboot(void)
+{
+	usb_dev_handle *rebootor;
+	int r;
+
+	rebootor = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0477);
+
+	if (!rebootor)
+		rebootor = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067);
+
+	if (!rebootor) return 0;
+	r = usb_control_msg(rebootor, 0x21, 9, 0x0200, 0, "reboot", 6, 100);
+	usb_release_interface(rebootor, 0);
+	usb_close(rebootor);
+	if (r < 0) return 0;
+	return 1;
+}
+
+#endif
+
+
+/****************************************************************/
+/*                                                              */
+/*               USB Access - Microsoft WIN32                   */
+/*                                                              */
+/****************************************************************/
+
+#if defined(USE_WIN32)
+
+// http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms790932.aspx
+#include <windows.h>
+#include <setupapi.h>
+#include <ddk/hidsdi.h>
+#include <ddk/hidclass.h>
+
+HANDLE open_usb_device(int vid, int pid)
+{
+	GUID guid;
+	HDEVINFO info;
+	DWORD index, required_size;
+	SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DATA iface;
+	SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DETAIL_DATA *details;
+	HIDD_ATTRIBUTES attrib;
+	HANDLE h;
+	BOOL ret;
+
+	HidD_GetHidGuid(&guid);
+	info = SetupDiGetClassDevs(&guid, NULL, NULL, DIGCF_PRESENT | DIGCF_DEVICEINTERFACE);
+	if (info == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) return NULL;
+	for (index=0; 1 ;index++) {
+		iface.cbSize = sizeof(SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DATA);
+		ret = SetupDiEnumDeviceInterfaces(info, NULL, &guid, index, &iface);
+		if (!ret) {
+			SetupDiDestroyDeviceInfoList(info);
+			break;
+		}
+		SetupDiGetInterfaceDeviceDetail(info, &iface, NULL, 0, &required_size, NULL);
+		details = (SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DETAIL_DATA *)malloc(required_size);
+		if (details == NULL) continue;
+		memset(details, 0, required_size);
+		details->cbSize = sizeof(SP_DEVICE_INTERFACE_DETAIL_DATA);
+		ret = SetupDiGetDeviceInterfaceDetail(info, &iface, details,
+			required_size, NULL, NULL);
+		if (!ret) {
+			free(details);
+			continue;
+		}
+		h = CreateFile(details->DevicePath, GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE,
+			FILE_SHARE_READ|FILE_SHARE_WRITE, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING,
+			FILE_FLAG_OVERLAPPED, NULL);
+		free(details);
+		if (h == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) continue;
+		attrib.Size = sizeof(HIDD_ATTRIBUTES);
+		ret = HidD_GetAttributes(h, &attrib);
+		if (!ret) {
+			CloseHandle(h);
+			continue;
+		}
+		if (attrib.VendorID != vid || attrib.ProductID != pid) {
+			CloseHandle(h);
+			continue;
+		}
+		SetupDiDestroyDeviceInfoList(info);
+		return h;
+	}
+	return NULL;
+}
+
+int write_usb_device(HANDLE h, void *buf, int len, int timeout)
+{
+	static HANDLE event = NULL;
+	unsigned char tmpbuf[1040];
+	OVERLAPPED ov;
+	DWORD n, r;
+
+	if (len > sizeof(tmpbuf) - 1) return 0;
+	if (event == NULL) {
+		event = CreateEvent(NULL, TRUE, TRUE, NULL);
+		if (!event) return 0;
+	}
+	ResetEvent(&event);
+	memset(&ov, 0, sizeof(ov));
+	ov.hEvent = event;
+	tmpbuf[0] = 0;
+	memcpy(tmpbuf + 1, buf, len);
+	if (!WriteFile(h, tmpbuf, len + 1, NULL, &ov)) {
+		if (GetLastError() != ERROR_IO_PENDING) return 0;
+		r = WaitForSingleObject(event, timeout);
+		if (r == WAIT_TIMEOUT) {
+			CancelIo(h);
+			return 0;
+		}
+		if (r != WAIT_OBJECT_0) return 0;
+	}
+	if (!GetOverlappedResult(h, &ov, &n, FALSE)) return 0;
+	return 1;
+}
+
+static HANDLE win32_teensy_handle = NULL;
+
+int teensy_open(void)
+{
+	teensy_close();
+	win32_teensy_handle = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0478);
+
+	if (!win32_teensy_handle)
+		win32_teensy_handle = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067);
+
+	if (!win32_teensy_handle) return 0;
+	return 1;
+}
+
+int teensy_write(void *buf, int len, double timeout)
+{
+	int r;
+	if (!win32_teensy_handle) return 0;
+	r = write_usb_device(win32_teensy_handle, buf, len, (int)(timeout * 1000.0));
+	return r;
+}
+
+void teensy_close(void)
+{
+	if (!win32_teensy_handle) return;
+	CloseHandle(win32_teensy_handle);
+	win32_teensy_handle = NULL;
+}
+
+int hard_reboot(void)
+{
+	HANDLE rebootor;
+	int r;
+
+	rebootor = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0477);
+
+	if (!rebootor)
+		rebootor = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067);
+
+	if (!rebootor) return 0;
+	r = write_usb_device(rebootor, "reboot", 6, 100);
+	CloseHandle(rebootor);
+	return r;
+}
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/****************************************************************/
+/*                                                              */
+/*             USB Access - Apple's IOKit, Mac OS-X             */
+/*                                                              */
+/****************************************************************/
+
+#if defined(USE_APPLE_IOKIT)
+
+// http://developer.apple.com/technotes/tn2007/tn2187.html
+#include <IOKit/IOKitLib.h>
+#include <IOKit/hid/IOHIDLib.h>
+#include <IOKit/hid/IOHIDDevice.h>
+
+struct usb_list_struct {
+	IOHIDDeviceRef ref;
+	int pid;
+	int vid;
+	struct usb_list_struct *next;
+};
+
+static struct usb_list_struct *usb_list=NULL;
+static IOHIDManagerRef hid_manager=NULL;
+
+void attach_callback(void *context, IOReturn r, void *hid_mgr, IOHIDDeviceRef dev)
+{
+	CFTypeRef type;
+	struct usb_list_struct *n, *p;
+	int32_t pid, vid;
+
+	if (!dev) return;
+	type = IOHIDDeviceGetProperty(dev, CFSTR(kIOHIDVendorIDKey));
+	if (!type || CFGetTypeID(type) != CFNumberGetTypeID()) return;
+	if (!CFNumberGetValue((CFNumberRef)type, kCFNumberSInt32Type, &vid)) return;
+	type = IOHIDDeviceGetProperty(dev, CFSTR(kIOHIDProductIDKey));
+	if (!type || CFGetTypeID(type) != CFNumberGetTypeID()) return;
+	if (!CFNumberGetValue((CFNumberRef)type, kCFNumberSInt32Type, &pid)) return;
+	n = (struct usb_list_struct *)malloc(sizeof(struct usb_list_struct));
+	if (!n) return;
+	//printf("attach callback: vid=%04X, pid=%04X\n", vid, pid);
+	n->ref = dev;
+	n->vid = vid;
+	n->pid = pid;
+	n->next = NULL;
+	if (usb_list == NULL) {
+		usb_list = n;
+	} else {
+		for (p = usb_list; p->next; p = p->next) ;
+		p->next = n;
+	}
+}
+
+void detach_callback(void *context, IOReturn r, void *hid_mgr, IOHIDDeviceRef dev)
+{
+	struct usb_list_struct *p, *tmp, *prev=NULL;
+
+	p = usb_list;
+	while (p) {
+		if (p->ref == dev) {
+			if (prev) {
+				prev->next = p->next;
+			} else {
+				usb_list = p->next;
+			}
+			tmp = p;
+			p = p->next;
+			free(tmp);
+		} else {
+			prev = p;
+			p = p->next;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+void init_hid_manager(void)
+{
+	CFMutableDictionaryRef dict;
+	IOReturn ret;
+
+	if (hid_manager) return;
+	hid_manager = IOHIDManagerCreate(kCFAllocatorDefault, kIOHIDOptionsTypeNone);
+	if (hid_manager == NULL || CFGetTypeID(hid_manager) != IOHIDManagerGetTypeID()) {
+		if (hid_manager) CFRelease(hid_manager);
+		printf_verbose("no HID Manager - maybe this is a pre-Leopard (10.5) system?\n");
+		return;
+	}
+	dict = CFDictionaryCreateMutable(kCFAllocatorDefault, 0,
+		&kCFTypeDictionaryKeyCallBacks, &kCFTypeDictionaryValueCallBacks);
+	if (!dict) return;
+	IOHIDManagerSetDeviceMatching(hid_manager, dict);
+	CFRelease(dict);
+	IOHIDManagerScheduleWithRunLoop(hid_manager, CFRunLoopGetCurrent(), kCFRunLoopDefaultMode);
+	IOHIDManagerRegisterDeviceMatchingCallback(hid_manager, attach_callback, NULL);
+	IOHIDManagerRegisterDeviceRemovalCallback(hid_manager, detach_callback, NULL);
+	ret = IOHIDManagerOpen(hid_manager, kIOHIDOptionsTypeNone);
+	if (ret != kIOReturnSuccess) {
+		IOHIDManagerUnscheduleFromRunLoop(hid_manager,
+			CFRunLoopGetCurrent(), kCFRunLoopDefaultMode);
+		CFRelease(hid_manager);
+		printf_verbose("Error opening HID Manager");
+	}
+}
+
+static void do_run_loop(void)
+{
+	while (CFRunLoopRunInMode(kCFRunLoopDefaultMode, 0, true) == kCFRunLoopRunHandledSource) ;
+}
+
+IOHIDDeviceRef open_usb_device(int vid, int pid)
+{
+	struct usb_list_struct *p;
+	IOReturn ret;
+
+	init_hid_manager();
+	do_run_loop();
+	for (p = usb_list; p; p = p->next) {
+		if (p->vid == vid && p->pid == pid) {
+			ret = IOHIDDeviceOpen(p->ref, kIOHIDOptionsTypeNone);
+			if (ret == kIOReturnSuccess) return p->ref;
+		}
+	}
+	return NULL;
+}
+
+void close_usb_device(IOHIDDeviceRef dev)
+{
+	struct usb_list_struct *p;
+
+	do_run_loop();
+	for (p = usb_list; p; p = p->next) {
+		if (p->ref == dev) {
+			IOHIDDeviceClose(dev, kIOHIDOptionsTypeNone);
+			return;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+static IOHIDDeviceRef iokit_teensy_reference = NULL;
+
+int teensy_open(void)
+{
+	teensy_close();
+	iokit_teensy_reference = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0478);
+
+	if (!iokit_teensy_reference)
+		iokit_teensy_reference = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067);
+
+	if (!iokit_teensy_reference) return 0;
+	return 1;
+}
+
+int teensy_write(void *buf, int len, double timeout)
+{
+	IOReturn ret;
+
+	// timeouts do not work on OS-X
+	// IOHIDDeviceSetReportWithCallback is not implemented
+	// even though Apple documents it with a code example!
+	// submitted to Apple on 22-sep-2009, problem ID 7245050
+	if (!iokit_teensy_reference) return 0;
+	ret = IOHIDDeviceSetReport(iokit_teensy_reference,
+		kIOHIDReportTypeOutput, 0, buf, len);
+	if (ret == kIOReturnSuccess) return 1;
+	return 0;
+}
+
+void teensy_close(void)
+{
+	if (!iokit_teensy_reference) return;
+	close_usb_device(iokit_teensy_reference);
+	iokit_teensy_reference = NULL;
+}
+
+int hard_reboot(void)
+{
+	IOHIDDeviceRef rebootor;
+	IOReturn ret;
+
+	rebootor = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0477);
+
+	if (!rebootor)
+		rebootor = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067);
+
+	if (!rebootor) return 0;
+	ret = IOHIDDeviceSetReport(rebootor,
+		kIOHIDReportTypeOutput, 0, (uint8_t *)("reboot"), 6);
+	close_usb_device(rebootor);
+	if (ret == kIOReturnSuccess) return 1;
+	return 0;
+}
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/****************************************************************/
+/*                                                              */
+/*              USB Access - BSD's UHID driver                  */
+/*                                                              */
+/****************************************************************/
+
+#if defined(USE_UHID)
+
+// Thanks to Todd T Fries for help getting this working on OpenBSD
+// and to Chris Kuethe for the initial patch to use UHID.
+
+#include <sys/ioctl.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <dirent.h>
+#include <dev/usb/usb.h>
+#ifndef USB_GET_DEVICEINFO
+#include <dev/usb/usb_ioctl.h>
+#endif
+
+#ifndef USB_GET_DEVICEINFO
+# define USB_GET_DEVICEINFO 0
+# error The USB_GET_DEVICEINFO ioctl() value is not defined for your system.
+#endif
+
+int open_usb_device(int vid, int pid)
+{
+	int r, fd;
+	DIR *dir;
+	struct dirent *d;
+	struct usb_device_info info;
+	char buf[256];
+
+	dir = opendir("/dev");
+	if (!dir) return -1;
+	while ((d = readdir(dir)) != NULL) {
+		if (strncmp(d->d_name, "uhid", 4) != 0) continue;
+		snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "/dev/%s", d->d_name);
+		fd = open(buf, O_RDWR);
+		if (fd < 0) continue;
+		r = ioctl(fd, USB_GET_DEVICEINFO, &info);
+		if (r < 0) {
+			// NetBSD: added in 2004
+			// OpenBSD: added November 23, 2009
+			// FreeBSD: missing (FreeBSD 8.0) - USE_LIBUSB works!
+			die("Error: your uhid driver does not support"
+			  " USB_GET_DEVICEINFO, please upgrade!\n");
+			close(fd);
+			closedir(dir);
+			exit(1);
+		}
+		//printf("%s: v=%d, p=%d\n", buf, info.udi_vendorNo, info.udi_productNo);
+		if (info.udi_vendorNo == vid && info.udi_productNo == pid) {
+			closedir(dir);
+			return fd;
+		}
+		close(fd);
+	}
+	closedir(dir);
+	return -1;
+}
+
+static int uhid_teensy_fd = -1;
+
+int teensy_open(void)
+{
+	teensy_close();
+	uhid_teensy_fd = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0478);
+
+	if (uhid_teensy_fd < 0)
+		uhid_teensy_fd = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067);
+
+	if (uhid_teensy_fd < 0) return 0;
+	return 1;
+}
+
+int teensy_write(void *buf, int len, double timeout)
+{
+	int r;
+
+	// TODO: implement timeout... how??
+	r = write(uhid_teensy_fd, buf, len);
+	if (r == len) return 1;
+	return 0;
+}
+
+void teensy_close(void)
+{
+	if (uhid_teensy_fd >= 0) {
+		close(uhid_teensy_fd);
+		uhid_teensy_fd = -1;
+	}
+}
+
+int hard_reboot(void)
+{
+	int r, rebootor_fd;
+
+	rebootor_fd = open_usb_device(0x16C0, 0x0477);
+
+	if (rebootor_fd < 0)
+		rebootor_fd = open_usb_device(0x03eb, 0x2067);
+
+	if (rebootor_fd < 0) return 0;
+	r = write(rebootor_fd, "reboot", 6);
+	delay(0.1);
+	close(rebootor_fd);
+	if (r == 6) return 1;
+	return 0;
+}
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/****************************************************************/
+/*                                                              */
+/*                     Read Intel Hex File                      */
+/*                                                              */
+/****************************************************************/
+
+// the maximum flash image size we can support
+// chips with larger memory may be used, but only this
+// much intel-hex data can be loaded into memory!
+#define MAX_MEMORY_SIZE 0x10000
+
+static unsigned char firmware_image[MAX_MEMORY_SIZE];
+static unsigned char firmware_mask[MAX_MEMORY_SIZE];
+static int end_record_seen=0;
+static int byte_count;
+static unsigned int extended_addr = 0;
+static int parse_hex_line(char *line);
+
+int read_intel_hex(const char *filename)
+{
+	FILE *fp;
+	int i, lineno=0;
+	char buf[1024];
+
+	byte_count = 0;
+	end_record_seen = 0;
+	for (i=0; i<MAX_MEMORY_SIZE; i++) {
+		firmware_image[i] = 0xFF;
+		firmware_mask[i] = 0;
+	}
+	extended_addr = 0;
+
+	fp = fopen(filename, "r");
+	if (fp == NULL) {
+		//printf("Unable to read file %s\n", filename);
+		return -1;
+	}
+	while (!feof(fp)) {
+		*buf = '\0';
+		if (!fgets(buf, sizeof(buf), fp)) break;
+		lineno++;
+		if (*buf) {
+			if (parse_hex_line(buf) == 0) {
+				//printf("Warning, parse error line %d\n", lineno);
+				fclose(fp);
+				return -2;
+			}
+		}
+		if (end_record_seen) break;
+		if (feof(stdin)) break;
+	}
+	fclose(fp);
+	return byte_count;
+}
+
+
+/* from ihex.c, at http://www.pjrc.com/tech/8051/pm2_docs/intel-hex.html */
+
+/* parses a line of intel hex code, stores the data in bytes[] */
+/* and the beginning address in addr, and returns a 1 if the */
+/* line was valid, or a 0 if an error occurred.  The variable */
+/* num gets the number of bytes that were stored into bytes[] */
+
+
+int
+parse_hex_line(char *line)
+{
+	int addr, code, num;
+        int sum, len, cksum, i;
+        char *ptr;
+
+        num = 0;
+        if (line[0] != ':') return 0;
+        if (strlen(line) < 11) return 0;
+        ptr = line+1;
+        if (!sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &len)) return 0;
+        ptr += 2;
+        if ((int)strlen(line) < (11 + (len * 2)) ) return 0;
+        if (!sscanf(ptr, "%04x", &addr)) return 0;
+        ptr += 4;
+          /* printf("Line: length=%d Addr=%d\n", len, addr); */
+        if (!sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &code)) return 0;
+	if (addr + extended_addr + len >= MAX_MEMORY_SIZE) return 0;
+        ptr += 2;
+        sum = (len & 255) + ((addr >> 8) & 255) + (addr & 255) + (code & 255);
+	if (code != 0) {
+		if (code == 1) {
+			end_record_seen = 1;
+			return 1;
+		}
+		if (code == 2 && len == 2) {
+			if (!sscanf(ptr, "%04x", &i)) return 1;
+			ptr += 4;
+			sum += ((i >> 8) & 255) + (i & 255);
+        		if (!sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &cksum)) return 1;
+			if (((sum & 255) + (cksum & 255)) & 255) return 1;
+			extended_addr = i << 4;
+			//printf("ext addr = %05X\n", extended_addr);
+		}
+		if (code == 4 && len == 2) {
+			if (!sscanf(ptr, "%04x", &i)) return 1;
+			ptr += 4;
+			sum += ((i >> 8) & 255) + (i & 255);
+        		if (!sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &cksum)) return 1;
+			if (((sum & 255) + (cksum & 255)) & 255) return 1;
+			extended_addr = i << 16;
+			//printf("ext addr = %08X\n", extended_addr);
+		}
+		return 1;	// non-data line
+	}
+	byte_count += len;
+        while (num != len) {
+                if (sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &i) != 1) return 0;
+		i &= 255;
+		firmware_image[addr + extended_addr + num] = i;
+		firmware_mask[addr + extended_addr + num] = 1;
+                ptr += 2;
+                sum += i;
+                (num)++;
+                if (num >= 256) return 0;
+        }
+        if (!sscanf(ptr, "%02x", &cksum)) return 0;
+        if (((sum & 255) + (cksum & 255)) & 255) return 0; /* checksum error */
+        return 1;
+}
+
+int ihex_bytes_within_range(int begin, int end)
+{
+	int i;
+
+	if (begin < 0 || begin >= MAX_MEMORY_SIZE ||
+	   end < 0 || end >= MAX_MEMORY_SIZE) {
+		return 0;
+	}
+	for (i=begin; i<=end; i++) {
+		if (firmware_mask[i]) return 1;
+	}
+	return 0;
+}
+
+void ihex_get_data(int addr, int len, unsigned char *bytes)
+{
+	int i;
+
+	if (addr < 0 || len < 0 || addr + len >= MAX_MEMORY_SIZE) {
+		for (i=0; i<len; i++) {
+			bytes[i] = 255;
+		}
+		return;
+	}
+	for (i=0; i<len; i++) {
+		if (firmware_mask[addr]) {
+			bytes[i] = firmware_image[addr];
+		} else {
+			bytes[i] = 255;
+		}
+		addr++;
+	}
+}
+
+/****************************************************************/
+/*                                                              */
+/*                       Misc Functions                         */
+/*                                                              */
+/****************************************************************/
+
+int printf_verbose(const char *format, ...)
+{
+	va_list ap;
+	int r = 0;
+
+	va_start(ap, format);
+	if (verbose) {
+		r = vprintf(format, ap);
+		fflush(stdout);
+	}
+	va_end(ap);
+
+	return r;
+}
+
+void delay(double seconds)
+{
+	#ifdef USE_WIN32
+	sleep(seconds * 1000.0);
+	#else
+	usleep(seconds * 1000000.0);
+	#endif
+}
+
+void die(const char *str, ...)
+{
+	va_list  ap;
+
+	va_start(ap, str);
+	vfprintf(stderr, str, ap);
+	fprintf(stderr, "\n");
+	va_end(ap);
+
+	exit(1);
+}
+
+#if defined USE_WIN32
+#define strcasecmp stricmp
+#endif
+
+void parse_options(int argc, char **argv)
+{
+	int i;
+	const char *arg;
+
+	for (i=1; i<argc; i++) {
+		arg = argv[i];
+
+		if (*arg == '-') {
+			if (strcmp(arg, "-w") == 0) {
+				wait_for_device_to_appear = 1;
+			} else if (strcmp(arg, "-r") == 0) {
+				hard_reboot_device = 1;
+			} else if (strcmp(arg, "-n") == 0) {
+				reboot_after_programming = 0;
+			} else if (strcmp(arg, "-v") == 0) {
+				verbose = 1;
+			} else if (strncmp(arg, "-mmcu=", 6) == 0) {
+				arg += 6;
+
+				if (strncmp(arg, "at90usb", 7) == 0) {
+					arg += 7;
+				} else if (strncmp(arg, "atmega", 6) == 0) {
+					arg += 6;
+				} else {
+					die("Unknown MCU type\n");
+				}
+
+				if (strncmp(arg, "128", 3) == 0) {
+					code_size  = 128 * 1024;
+					block_size = 256;
+				} else if (strncmp(arg, "64", 2) == 0) {
+					code_size  = 64 * 1024;
+					block_size = 256;
+				} else if (strncmp(arg, "32", 2) == 0) {
+					code_size  = 32 * 1024;
+					block_size = 128;
+				} else if (strncmp(arg, "16", 2) == 0) {
+					code_size  = 16 * 1024;
+					block_size = 128;
+				} else if (strncmp(arg, "8", 1) == 0) {
+					code_size  = 8 * 1024;
+					block_size = 128;
+				} else {
+					die("Unknown MCU type\n");
+				}
+			}
+		} else {
+			filename = argv[i];
+		}
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp_Python/hid_bootloader_loader.py b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp_Python/hid_bootloader_loader.py
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cb824f582
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/HostLoaderApp_Python/hid_bootloader_loader.py
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+"""
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+"""
+
+"""
+    Front-end programmer for the LUFA HID class bootloader.
+
+    Usage:
+        python hid_bootloader_loader.py <Device> <Input>.hex
+
+    Example:
+        python hid_bootloader_loader.py at90usb1287 Mouse.hex
+
+    Requires the pywinusb (https://pypi.python.org/pypi/pywinusb/) and
+    IntelHex (https://pypi.python.org/pypi/IntelHex/) libraries.
+"""
+
+import sys
+from pywinusb import hid
+from intelhex import IntelHex
+
+
+# Device information table
+device_info_map = dict()
+device_info_map['at90usb1287'] = {'page_size': 256, 'flash_kb': 128}
+device_info_map['at90usb1286'] = {'page_size': 256, 'flash_kb': 128}
+device_info_map['at90usb647']  = {'page_size': 256, 'flash_kb': 64}
+device_info_map['at90usb646']  = {'page_size': 256, 'flash_kb': 64}
+device_info_map['atmega32u4']  = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 32}
+device_info_map['atmega32u2']  = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 32}
+device_info_map['atmega16u4']  = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 16}
+device_info_map['atmega16u2']  = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 16}
+device_info_map['at90usb162']  = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 16}
+device_info_map['atmega8u2']   = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 8}
+device_info_map['at90usb82']   = {'page_size': 128, 'flash_kb': 8}
+
+
+def get_hid_device_handle():
+    hid_device_filter = hid.HidDeviceFilter(vendor_id=0x03EB,
+                                            product_id=0x2067)
+
+    valid_hid_devices = hid_device_filter.get_devices()
+
+    if len(valid_hid_devices) is 0:
+        return None
+    else:
+        return valid_hid_devices[0]
+
+
+def send_page_data(hid_device, address, data):
+    # Bootloader page data should be the HID Report ID (always zero) followed
+    # by the starting address to program, then one device's flash page worth
+    # of data
+    output_report_data = [0]
+    output_report_data.extend([address & 0xFF, address >> 8])
+    output_report_data.extend(data)
+
+    hid_device.send_output_report(output_report_data)
+
+
+def program_device(hex_data, device_info):
+    hid_device = get_hid_device_handle()
+
+    if hid_device is None:
+        print("No valid HID device found.")
+        sys.exit(1)
+
+    try:
+        hid_device.open()
+        print("Connected to bootloader.")
+
+        # Program in all data from the loaded HEX file, in a number of device
+        # page sized chunks
+        for addr in range(0, hex_data.maxaddr(), device_info['page_size']):
+            # Compute the address range of the current page in the device
+            current_page_range = range(addr, addr+device_info['page_size'])
+
+            # Extract the data from the hex file at the specified start page
+            # address and convert it to a regular list of bytes
+            page_data = [hex_data[i] for i in current_page_range]
+
+            print("Writing address 0x%04X-0x%04X" % (current_page_range[0], current_page_range[-1]))
+
+            # Devices with more than 64KB of flash should shift down the page
+            # address so that it is 16-bit (page size is guaranteed to be
+            # >= 256 bytes so no non-zero address bits are discarded)
+            if device_info['flash_kb'] < 64:
+                send_page_data(hid_device, addr, page_data)
+            else:
+                send_page_data(hid_device, addr >> 8, page_data)
+
+        # Once programming is complete, start the application via a dummy page
+        # program to the page address 0xFFFF
+        print("Programming complete, starting application.")
+        send_page_data(hid_device, 0xFFFF, [0] * device_info['page_size'])
+
+    finally:
+        hid_device.close()
+
+
+if __name__ == '__main__':
+    # Load the specified HEX file
+    try:
+        hex_data = IntelHex(sys.argv[2])
+    except:
+        print("Could not open the specified HEX file.")
+        sys.exit(1)
+
+    # Retrieve the device information entry for the specified device
+    try:
+        device_info = device_info_map[sys.argv[1]]
+    except:
+        print("Unknown device name specified.")
+        sys.exit(1)
+
+    program_device(hex_data, device_info)
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c67b9419e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+	<project caption="HID Bootloader - 128KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid.avr8.128_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_hid_128kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.hid"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1F000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1F000"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="HID Bootloader - 64KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid.avr8.64_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_hid_64kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.hid"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="at90usb647"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0xF000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0xF000"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="HID Bootloader - 32KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid.avr8.32_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_hid_32kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.hid"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x7000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x7000"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="HID Bootloader - 16KB FLASH / 2KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid.avr8.16_2" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_hid_16kb_2kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.hid"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="atmega16u2"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x3800"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x3800"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="HID Bootloader - 8KB FLASH / 2KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid.avr8.8_2" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_hid_8kb_2kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.hid"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="atmega8u2"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1800"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1800"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<module type="application" id="lufa.bootloaders.hid" caption="HID Bootloader">
+		<info type="description" value="summary">
+		HID Class Bootloader, capable of reprogramming a device via a custom cross-platform command line utility when plugged into a host.
+		</info>
+
+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+			<keyword value="Bootloaders"/>
+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>
+		</info>
+
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+		<build type="include-path" value="."/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderHID.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderHID.h"/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+
+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="BootloaderHID.txt"/>
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="HostLoaderApp"/>
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="HostLoaderApp_Python"/>
+
+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+	</module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4c3de5ab9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2398 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.9
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - HID Class Bootloader"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included
+# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55
+# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy
+# the logo to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new
+# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part
+# of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or
+# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO,
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option
+# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will
+# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to
+# YES the compound reference will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo
+# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test
+# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete
+# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/ \
+                         HostLoaderApp/ \
+                         HostLoaderApp_Python/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty,
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated
+# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated
+# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty
+# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred
+# to HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created
+# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen
+# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code
+# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_SOURCE_CODE        = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an
+# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the
+# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is
+# still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM \
+                         ATTR_NO_INIT
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in
+# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by
+# the !include statement in a plantuml block.
+
+PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH  =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/makefile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..12cfadb5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/HID/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = BootloaderHID
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     = -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET)
+
+# Flash size and bootloader section sizes of the target, in KB. These must
+# match the target's total FLASH size and the bootloader size set in the
+# device's fuses.
+FLASH_SIZE_KB        := 128
+BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB := 8
+
+# Bootloader address calculation formulas
+# Do not modify these macros, but rather modify the dependent values above.
+CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX   = $(shell printf "0x%X" $$(( $(1) )) )
+BOOT_START_OFFSET     = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 )
+BOOT_SEC_OFFSET       = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) * 1024) - ($(strip $(1))) )
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules
+DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA
+include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk
+include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk
+
+# Include common DMBS build system modules
+DMBS_PATH      ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..491c506d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Bootloader user application API functions.
+ */
+
+#include "BootloaderAPI.h"
+
+void BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	boot_page_erase_safe(Address);
+	boot_spm_busy_wait();
+	boot_rww_enable();
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	boot_page_write_safe(Address);
+	boot_spm_busy_wait();
+	boot_rww_enable();
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word)
+{
+	boot_page_fill_safe(Address, Word);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	return boot_signature_byte_get(Address);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(Address);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void)
+{
+	return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS);
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits)
+{
+	boot_lock_bits_set_safe(LockBits);
+}
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4889b4c0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderAPI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_API_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADER_API_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE > 0
+			#define AUX_BOOT_SECTION       __attribute__((section(".boot_aux")))
+		#else
+			#define AUX_BOOT_SECTION
+		#endif
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPITable.S b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPITable.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..44eb15ea9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderAPITable.S
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#if AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE > 0
+#warning Using a AUX bootloader section in addition to the defined bootloader space (see documentation).
+
+; Trampoline to jump over the AUX bootloader section to the start of the bootloader,
+; on devices where an AUX bootloader section is used.
+.section .boot_aux_trampoline, "ax"
+.global Boot_AUX_Trampoline
+Boot_AUX_Trampoline:
+	jmp BOOT_START_ADDR
+#endif
+
+; Trampolines to actual API implementations if the target address is outside the
+; range of a rjmp instruction (can happen with large bootloader sections)
+.section .apitable_trampolines, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_Trampolines
+BootloaderAPI_Trampolines:
+
+	BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage
+	BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage
+	BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock
+	BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5:
+		ret
+
+
+
+; API function jump table
+.section .apitable_jumptable, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_JumpTable
+BootloaderAPI_JumpTable:
+
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1 ; UNUSED ENTRY 1
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2 ; UNUSED ENTRY 2
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3 ; UNUSED ENTRY 3
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4 ; UNUSED ENTRY 4
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5 ; UNUSED ENTRY 5
+
+
+
+; Bootloader table signatures and information
+.section .apitable_signatures, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_Signatures
+BootloaderAPI_Signatures:
+
+	.long BOOT_START_ADDR ; Start address of the bootloader
+	.word 0xDF30 ; Signature for the MS class bootloader, V1
+	.word 0xDCFB ; Signature for a LUFA class bootloader
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6c9697b66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.c
@@ -0,0 +1,263 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Mass Storage class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_MASSSTORAGE_C
+#include "BootloaderMassStorage.h"
+
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber           = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+				.DataINEndpoint            =
+					{
+						.Address           = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size              = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks             = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address           = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+						.Size              = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks             = 1,
+					},
+				.TotalLUNs                 = 1,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
+ *  via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application
+ *  started via a forced watchdog reset.
+ */
+bool RunBootloader = true;
+
+/** Magic lock for forced application start. If the HWBE fuse is programmed and BOOTRST is unprogrammed, the bootloader
+ *  will start if the /HWB line of the AVR is held low and the system is reset. However, if the /HWB line is still held
+ *  low when the application attempts to start via a watchdog reset, the bootloader will re-start. If set to the value
+ *  \ref MAGIC_BOOT_KEY the special init function \ref Application_Jump_Check() will force the application to start.
+ */
+uint16_t MagicBootKey ATTR_NO_INIT;
+
+/** Indicates if the bootloader is allowed to exit immediately if \ref RunBootloader is \c false. During shutdown all
+ *  pending commands must be processed before jumping to the user-application, thus this tracks the main program loop
+ *  iterations since a SCSI command from the host was received.
+ */
+static uint8_t TicksSinceLastCommand = 0;
+
+
+/** Special startup routine to check if the bootloader was started via a watchdog reset, and if the magic application
+ *  start key has been loaded into \ref MagicBootKey. If the bootloader started via the watchdog and the key is valid,
+ *  this will force the user application to start via a software jump.
+ */
+void Application_Jump_Check(void)
+{
+	bool JumpToApplication = false;
+
+	#if (BOARD == BOARD_LEONARDO)
+		/* Enable pull-up on the IO13 pin so we can use it to select the mode */
+		PORTC |= (1 << 7);
+		Delay_MS(10);
+
+		/* If IO13 is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */
+		JumpToApplication = ((PINC & (1 << 7)) != 0);
+
+		/* Disable pull-up after the check has completed */
+		PORTC &= ~(1 << 7);
+	#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+		/* Disable JTAG debugging */
+		JTAG_DISABLE();
+
+		/* Enable pull-up on the JTAG TCK pin so we can use it to select the mode */
+		PORTF |= (1 << 4);
+		Delay_MS(10);
+
+		/* If the TCK pin is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */
+		JumpToApplication = ((PINF & (1 << 4)) != 0);
+
+		/* Re-enable JTAG debugging */
+		JTAG_ENABLE();
+	#else
+		/* Check if the device's BOOTRST fuse is set */
+		if (boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_HIGH_FUSE_BITS) & FUSE_BOOTRST)
+		{
+			/* If the reset source was not an external reset or the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application */
+			if (!(MCUSR & (1 << EXTRF)) || (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
+			  JumpToApplication = true;
+
+			/* Clear reset source */
+			MCUSR &= ~(1 << EXTRF);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application;
+			 * this can happen in the HWBE fuse is set, and the HBE pin is low during the watchdog reset */
+			if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
+				JumpToApplication = true;
+
+			/* Clear reset source */
+			MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+		}
+	#endif
+
+	/* Don't run the user application if the reset vector is blank (no app loaded) */
+	bool ApplicationValid = (pgm_read_word_near(0) != 0xFFFF);
+
+	/* If a request has been made to jump to the user application, honor it */
+	if (JumpToApplication && ApplicationValid)
+	{
+		/* Turn off the watchdog */
+		MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+		wdt_disable();
+
+		/* Clear the boot key and jump to the user application */
+		MagicBootKey = 0;
+
+		// cppcheck-suppress constStatement
+		((void (*)(void))0x0000)();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	while (RunBootloader || TicksSinceLastCommand++ < 0xFF)
+	{
+		MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+
+	/* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */
+	USB_Detach();
+
+	/* Unlock the forced application start mode of the bootloader if it is restarted */
+	MagicBootKey = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY;
+
+	/* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */
+	wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
+
+	for (;;);
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+static void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Bootloader active LED toggle timer initialization */
+	TIMSK1 = (1 << TOIE1);
+	TCCR1B = ((1 << CS11) | (1 << CS10));
+}
+
+/** ISR to periodically toggle the LEDs on the board to indicate that the bootloader is active. */
+ISR(TIMER1_OVF_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the Mass Storage management task.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup Mass Storage Data Endpoints */
+	ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	/* Signal that a command was processed, must not exit bootloader yet */
+	TicksSinceLastCommand = 0;
+
+	return CommandSuccess;
+}
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c9ddee4d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.h
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderMassStorage.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_MASS_STORAGE_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADER_MASS_STORAGE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__OPTIMIZE_SIZE__)
+			#error This bootloader requires that it be optimized for size, not speed, to fit into the target device. Change optimization settings and try again.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+		/** Magic bootloader key to unlock forced application start mode. */
+		#define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY             0xDC42
+
+	/* Global Variables: */
+		extern bool RunBootloader;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		int main(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+		void Application_Jump_Check(void) ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_BOOTLOADER_MASSSTORAGE_C)
+			static void SetupHardware(void) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.txt b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0fea9d9fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/BootloaderMassStorage.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,240 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mass Storage Class USB AVR Bootloader
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) - <i>See \ref SSec_Aux_Space</i>
+ *  \li ATMEGA32U2 - <i>See \ref SSec_Aux_Space</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bulk-Only Transport</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  This bootloader enumerates to the host as a Mass Storage device, capable of reading and writing a new binary
+ *  firmware image file, to load firmware onto the AVR.
+ *
+ *  Out of the box this bootloader builds for the AT90USB1287 with an 8KB bootloader section size, and will fit
+ *  into 6KB of bootloader space. If you wish to alter this size and/or change the AVR model, you will need to
+ *  edit the MCU, FLASH_SIZE_KB and BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB values in the accompanying makefile.
+ *
+ *  When the bootloader is running, the board's LED(s) will flash at regular intervals to distinguish the
+ *  bootloader from the normal user application.
+ *
+ *  \warning <b>THIS BOOTLOADER IS NOT SECURE.</b> Malicious entities can recover written data, even if the device
+ *           lockbits are set.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Running Running the Bootloader
+ *
+ *  On the USB AVR8 devices, setting the \c HWBE device fuse will cause the bootloader to run if the \c HWB pin of
+ *  the AVR is grounded when the device is reset.
+ *
+ *  The are two behaviours of this bootloader, depending on the device's fuses:
+ *
+ *  <b>If the device's BOOTRST fuse is set</b>, the bootloader will run any time the system is reset from
+ *  the external reset pin, unless no valid user application has been loaded. To initiate the bootloader, the
+ *  device's external reset pin should be grounded momentarily.
+ *
+ *  <b>If the device's BOOTRST fuse is not set</b>, the bootloader will run only if initiated via a software
+ *  jump, or if the \c HWB pin was low during the last device reset (if the \c HWBE fuse is set).
+ *
+ *  For board specific exceptions to the above, see below.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_XPLAIN Atmel Xplain Board
+ *  Ground the USB AVR JTAG's \c TCK pin to ground when powering on the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the
+ *  \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_Leonardo Arduino Leonardo Board
+ *  Ground \c IO13 when powering the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the
+ *  \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation
+ *
+ *  This bootloader uses the Mass Storage drivers inbuilt into all modern operating systems, thus no additional
+ *  drivers need to be supplied for correct operation.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application
+ *
+ *  This bootloader is compatible with all operating systems that support the FAT12 file system format. To reprogram the
+ *  device, overwrite a file stored on the virtual FAT filesystem with a new binary (BIN format) image. Remember to safely
+ *  remove your device from the host using the host OS's ejection APIs, to ensure all data is correctly flushed to the
+ *  bootloader's virtual filesystem and not cached in the OS's file system driver.
+ *
+ *  The current device firmware can be read from the device by reading a file from the virtual FAT filesystem. Two files will
+ *  be present:
+ *    - <b>FLASH.BIN</b>, representing the AVR's internal flash memory
+ *    - <b>EEPROM.BIN</b>, representing the AVR's internal EEPROM memory
+ *
+ *  To convert an existing Intel HEX (.HEX) program file to a binary (.BIN) file suitable for this bootloader, run:
+ *    \code
+ *		avr-objcopy -O binary -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock -R .signature input.hex output.bin
+ *    \endcode
+ *  From a terminal, replacing <tt>input.hex</tt> and <tt>output.bin</tt> with the respective input and output filenames.
+ *  AVR EEPROM data files in Intel HEX format (.EEP) uses a similar technique:
+ *    \code
+ *		avr-objcopy -O binary input.eep output.bin
+ *    \endcode
+ *
+ *  \warning This bootloader is currently <b>incompatible with the Apple MacOS X OS Finder GUI</b>, due to the
+ *           large amount of meta files this OS attempts to write to the disk along with the new binaries. On
+ *           this platform, firmwares must be copied to the disk via the Terminal application only to prevent
+ *           firmware corruption.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_API User Application API
+ *
+ *  Several user application functions for FLASH and other special memory area manipulations are exposed by the bootloader,
+ *  allowing the user application to call into the bootloader at runtime to read and write FLASH data.
+ *
+ *  By default, the bootloader API jump table is located 32 bytes from the end of the device's FLASH memory, and follows the
+ *  following layout:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE          32
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START         ((FLASHEND + 1UL) - BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE)
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(Index)         (void*)((BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (Index * 2)) / 2)
+ *
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_ErasePage)(uint32_t Address)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(0);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_WritePage)(uint32_t Address)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(1);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_FillWord)(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Word) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(2);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature)(uint16_t Address)           = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(3);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse)(uint16_t Address)                = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(4);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadLock)(void)                            = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(5);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_WriteLock)(uint8_t LockBits)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(6);
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START   (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 2))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE         0xDCFB
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START   (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 4))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MASS_STORAGE_SIGNATURE  0xDF30
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START           (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 8))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_LENGTH          4
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  From the application the API support of the bootloader can be detected by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address
+ *  \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them to the value \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE. The class of bootloader
+ *  can be determined by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address \c BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them
+ *  to the value \c BOOTLOADER_MASS_STORAGE_SIGNATURE. The start address of the bootloader can be retrieved by reading the bytes
+ *  of FLASH memory starting from address \c BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_Aux_Space Auxiliary Bootloader Section
+ *  To make the bootloader function on smaller devices (those with a physical bootloader section of smaller than 6KB) a second
+ *  section of memory (called the <i>Auxiliary Bootloader Section</i>) is added before the start of the real bootloader section,
+ *  and is filled with a portion of the bootloader code. This allows smaller devices to run the bootloader, at the cost of an
+ *  additional portion of the device's FLASH (the bootloader section size in KB subtracted from the 6KB total size). A small
+ *  trampoline is inserted at the start of the auxiliary section so that the bootloader will run normally in the case of a blank
+ *  application section.
+ *
+ *  On devices supporting a 8KB bootloader section size, the AUX section is not created in the final binary.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_API_MemLayout Device Memory Map
+ *  The following illustration indicates the final memory map of the device when loaded with the bootloader.
+ *
+ *  \verbatim
+ *  +----------------------------+ 0x0000
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |      User Application      |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE - BOOT_AUX_SECTION_SIZE
+ *  | Booloader Start Trampoline |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE - BOOT_AUX_SECTION_SIZE + 4
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |     Auxiliary Bootloader   |
+ *  |  Space for Smaller Devices |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |   Bootloader Application   |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 96
+ *  |   API Table Trampolines    |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 32
+ *  |    Bootloader API Table    |
+ *  |   (User App. Accessible)   |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 8
+ *  |   Bootloader ID Constants  |
+ *  |   (User App. Accessible)   |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND
+ *  \endverbatim
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues:
+ *
+ *  \par In some cases, the application is not fully loaded into the device.
+ *  Write-caching on some operating systems may interfere with the normal
+ *  operation of the bootloader. Write caching should be disabled when using the
+ *  Mass Storage bootloader, or the file system synced via an appropriate command
+ *  (such as the OS's normal disk ejection command) before disconnecting the device.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_APP_START_ON_EJECT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to disable automatic start of the loaded application when the virtual
+ *        Mass Storage disk is ejected on the host.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..92eb364dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure LUFA's
+ *  compile time options, as an alternative to the compile time
+ *  constants supplied through a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+//	#define NO_APP_START_ON_EJECT
+
+#endif
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..735317867
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e8bdbd4f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,157 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2045,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.MS_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass,
+			.SubClass               = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint16_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	/* If/Else If chain compiles slightly smaller than a switch case */
+	if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Device)
+	{
+		Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+		Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+	}
+	else if (DescriptorType == DTYPE_Configuration)
+	{
+		Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+		Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..506f41af8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "BootloaderAPI.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR         (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Mass Storage Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage = 0, /**< Mass storage interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint16_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3c14eb901
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,294 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData =
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+
+		.Removable           = true,
+
+		.Version             = 0,
+
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Bootloader",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess = false;
+
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT:
+#if !defined(NO_APP_START_ON_EJECT)
+			/* If the user ejected the volume, signal bootloader exit at next opportunity. */
+			RunBootloader = ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4] & 0x03) != 0x02);
+#endif
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			CommandSuccess = true;
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if command was successfully processed */
+	if (CommandSuccess)
+	{
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData));
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData));
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	Endpoint_Write_32_BE(LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1);
+	Endpoint_Write_32_BE(SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                      const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint16_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+
+	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
+
+	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
+
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	for (uint16_t i = 0; i < TotalBlocks; i++)
+	{
+		if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+		  VirtualFAT_ReadBlock(BlockAddress + i);
+		else
+		  VirtualFAT_WriteBlock(BlockAddress + i);
+	}
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES);
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about
+ *  the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Send an empty header response indicating Write Protect flag is off */
+	Endpoint_Write_32_LE(0);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..419559336
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../BootloaderMassStorage.h"
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "VirtualFAT.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual)  do { SenseData.SenseKey                 = (Key);   \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode      = (Acode); \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); } while (0)
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                                      const bool IsDataRead) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ffd453128
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.c
@@ -0,0 +1,482 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Virtualized FAT12 filesystem implementation, to perform self-programming
+ *  in response to read and write requests to the virtual filesystem by the
+ *  host PC.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_VIRTUAL_FAT_C
+#include "VirtualFAT.h"
+
+/** FAT filesystem boot sector block, must be the first sector on the physical
+ *  disk so that the host can identify the presence of a FAT filesystem. This
+ *  block is truncated; normally a large bootstrap section is located near the
+ *  end of the block for booting purposes however as this is not meant to be a
+ *  bootable disk it is omitted for space reasons.
+ *
+ *  \note When returning the boot block to the host, the magic signature 0xAA55
+ *        must be added to the very end of the block to identify it as a boot
+ *        block.
+ */
+static const FATBootBlock_t BootBlock =
+	{
+		.Bootstrap               = {0xEB, 0x3C, 0x90},
+		.Description             = "mkdosfs",
+		.SectorSize              = SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES,
+		.SectorsPerCluster       = SECTOR_PER_CLUSTER,
+		.ReservedSectors         = 1,
+		.FATCopies               = 2,
+		.RootDirectoryEntries    = (SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES / sizeof(FATDirectoryEntry_t)),
+		.TotalSectors16          = LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS,
+		.MediaDescriptor         = 0xF8,
+		.SectorsPerFAT           = 1,
+		.SectorsPerTrack         = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS % 64),
+		.Heads                   = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS / 64),
+		.HiddenSectors           = 0,
+		.TotalSectors32          = 0,
+		.PhysicalDriveNum        = 0,
+		.ExtendedBootRecordSig   = 0x29,
+		.VolumeSerialNumber      = 0x12345678,
+		.VolumeLabel             = "LUFA BOOT  ",
+		.FilesystemIdentifier    = "FAT12   ",
+	};
+
+/** FAT 8.3 style directory entry, for the virtual FLASH contents file. */
+static FATDirectoryEntry_t FirmwareFileEntries[] =
+	{
+		/* Root volume label entry; disk label is contained in the Filename and
+		 * Extension fields (concatenated) with a special attribute flag - other
+		 * fields are ignored. Should be the same as the label in the boot block.
+		 */
+		[DISK_FILE_ENTRY_VolumeID] =
+		{
+			.MSDOS_Directory =
+				{
+					.Name            = "LUFA BOOT  ",
+					.Attributes      = FAT_FLAG_VOLUME_NAME,
+					.Reserved        = {0},
+					.CreationTime    = 0,
+					.CreationDate    = 0,
+					.StartingCluster = 0,
+					.Reserved2       = 0,
+				}
+		},
+
+		/* VFAT Long File Name entry for the virtual firmware file; required to
+		 * prevent corruption from systems that are unable to detect the device
+		 * as being a legacy MSDOS style FAT12 volume. */
+		[DISK_FILE_ENTRY_FLASH_LFN] =
+		{
+			.VFAT_LongFileName =
+				{
+					.Ordinal         = 1 | FAT_ORDINAL_LAST_ENTRY,
+					.Attribute       = FAT_FLAG_LONG_FILE_NAME,
+					.Reserved1       = 0,
+					.Reserved2       = 0,
+
+					.Checksum        = FAT_CHECKSUM('F','L','A','S','H',' ',' ',' ','B','I','N'),
+
+					.Unicode1        = 'F',
+					.Unicode2        = 'L',
+					.Unicode3        = 'A',
+					.Unicode4        = 'S',
+					.Unicode5        = 'H',
+					.Unicode6        = '.',
+					.Unicode7        = 'B',
+					.Unicode8        = 'I',
+					.Unicode9        = 'N',
+					.Unicode10       = 0,
+					.Unicode11       = 0,
+					.Unicode12       = 0,
+					.Unicode13       = 0,
+				}
+		},
+
+		/* MSDOS file entry for the virtual Firmware image. */
+		[DISK_FILE_ENTRY_FLASH_MSDOS] =
+		{
+			.MSDOS_File =
+				{
+					.Filename        = "FLASH   ",
+					.Extension       = "BIN",
+					.Attributes      = 0,
+					.Reserved        = {0},
+					.CreationTime    = FAT_TIME(1, 1, 0),
+					.CreationDate    = FAT_DATE(14, 2, 1989),
+					.StartingCluster = 2,
+					.FileSizeBytes   = FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES,
+				}
+		},
+
+		[DISK_FILE_ENTRY_EEPROM_LFN] =
+		{
+			.VFAT_LongFileName =
+				{
+					.Ordinal         = 1 | FAT_ORDINAL_LAST_ENTRY,
+					.Attribute       = FAT_FLAG_LONG_FILE_NAME,
+					.Reserved1       = 0,
+					.Reserved2       = 0,
+
+					.Checksum        = FAT_CHECKSUM('E','E','P','R','O','M',' ',' ','B','I','N'),
+
+					.Unicode1        = 'E',
+					.Unicode2        = 'E',
+					.Unicode3        = 'P',
+					.Unicode4        = 'R',
+					.Unicode5        = 'O',
+					.Unicode6        = 'M',
+					.Unicode7        = '.',
+					.Unicode8        = 'B',
+					.Unicode9        = 'I',
+					.Unicode10       = 'N',
+					.Unicode11       = 0,
+					.Unicode12       = 0,
+					.Unicode13       = 0,
+				}
+		},
+
+		[DISK_FILE_ENTRY_EEPROM_MSDOS] =
+		{
+			.MSDOS_File =
+				{
+					.Filename        = "EEPROM  ",
+					.Extension       = "BIN",
+					.Attributes      = 0,
+					.Reserved        = {0},
+					.CreationTime    = FAT_TIME(1, 1, 0),
+					.CreationDate    = FAT_DATE(14, 2, 1989),
+					.StartingCluster = 2 + FILE_CLUSTERS(FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES),
+					.FileSizeBytes   = EEPROM_FILE_SIZE_BYTES,
+				}
+		},
+	};
+
+/** Starting cluster of the virtual FLASH.BIN file on disk, tracked so that the
+ *  offset from the start of the data sector can be determined. On Windows
+ *  systems files are usually replaced using the original file's disk clusters,
+ *  while Linux appears to overwrite with an offset which must be compensated for.
+ */
+static const uint16_t* FLASHFileStartCluster  = &FirmwareFileEntries[DISK_FILE_ENTRY_FLASH_MSDOS].MSDOS_File.StartingCluster;
+
+/** Starting cluster of the virtual EEPROM.BIN file on disk, tracked so that the
+ *  offset from the start of the data sector can be determined. On Windows
+ *  systems files are usually replaced using the original file's disk clusters,
+ *  while Linux appears to overwrite with an offset which must be compensated for.
+ */
+static const uint16_t* EEPROMFileStartCluster = &FirmwareFileEntries[DISK_FILE_ENTRY_EEPROM_MSDOS].MSDOS_File.StartingCluster;
+
+/** Reads a byte of EEPROM out from the EEPROM memory space.
+ *
+ *  \note This function is required as the avr-libc EEPROM functions do not cope
+ *        with linker relaxations, and a jump longer than 4K of FLASH on the
+ *        larger USB AVRs will break the linker. This function is marked as
+ *        never inlinable and placed into the normal text segment so that the
+ *        call to the EEPROM function will be short even if the AUX boot section
+ *        is used.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  Address   Address of the EEPROM location to read from
+ *
+ *  \return Read byte of EEPROM data.
+ */
+static uint8_t ReadEEPROMByte(const uint8_t* const Address)
+{
+	return eeprom_read_byte(Address);
+}
+
+/** Writes a byte of EEPROM out to the EEPROM memory space.
+ *
+ *  \note This function is required as the avr-libc EEPROM functions do not cope
+ *        with linker relaxations, and a jump longer than 4K of FLASH on the
+ *        larger USB AVRs will break the linker. This function is marked as
+ *        never inlinable and placed into the normal text segment so that the
+ *        call to the EEPROM function will be short even if the AUX boot section
+ *        is used.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  Address   Address of the EEPROM location to write to
+ *  \param[in]  Data      New data to write to the EEPROM location
+ */
+static void WriteEEPROMByte(uint8_t* const Address,
+                            const uint8_t Data)
+{
+	 eeprom_update_byte(Address, Data);
+}
+
+/** Updates a FAT12 cluster entry in the FAT file table with the specified next
+ *  chain index. If the cluster is the last in the file chain, the magic value
+ *  \c 0xFFF should be used.
+ *
+ *  \note FAT data cluster indexes are offset by 2, so that cluster 2 is the
+ *        first file data cluster on the disk. See the FAT specification.
+ *
+ *  \param[out]  FATTable    Pointer to the FAT12 allocation table
+ *  \param[in]   Index       Index of the cluster entry to update
+ *  \param[in]   ChainEntry  Next cluster index in the file chain
+ */
+static void UpdateFAT12ClusterEntry(uint8_t* const FATTable,
+                                    const uint16_t Index,
+                                    const uint16_t ChainEntry)
+{
+	/* Calculate the starting offset of the cluster entry in the FAT12 table */
+	uint8_t FATOffset   = (Index + (Index >> 1));
+	bool    UpperNibble = ((Index & 1) != 0);
+
+	/* Check if the start of the entry is at an upper nibble of the byte, fill
+	 * out FAT12 entry as required */
+	if (UpperNibble)
+	{
+		FATTable[FATOffset]     = (FATTable[FATOffset] & 0x0F) | ((ChainEntry & 0x0F) << 4);
+		FATTable[FATOffset + 1] = (ChainEntry >> 4);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		FATTable[FATOffset]     = ChainEntry;
+		FATTable[FATOffset + 1] = (FATTable[FATOffset] & 0xF0) | (ChainEntry >> 8);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Updates a FAT12 cluster chain in the FAT file table with a linear chain of
+ *  the specified length.
+ *
+ *  \note FAT data cluster indexes are offset by 2, so that cluster 2 is the
+ *        first file data cluster on the disk. See the FAT specification.
+ *
+ *  \param[out]  FATTable     Pointer to the FAT12 allocation table
+ *  \param[in]   Index        Index of the start of the cluster chain to update
+ *  \param[in]   ChainLength  Length of the chain to write, in clusters
+ */
+static void UpdateFAT12ClusterChain(uint8_t* const FATTable,
+                                    const uint16_t Index,
+                                    const uint8_t ChainLength)
+{
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < ChainLength; i++)
+	{
+		uint16_t CurrentCluster = Index + i;
+		uint16_t NextCluster    = CurrentCluster + 1;
+
+		/* Mark last cluster as end of file */
+		if (i == (ChainLength - 1))
+		  NextCluster = 0xFFF;
+
+		UpdateFAT12ClusterEntry(FATTable, CurrentCluster, NextCluster);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Reads or writes a block of data from/to the physical device FLASH using a
+ *  block buffer stored in RAM, if the requested block is within the virtual
+ *  firmware file's sector ranges in the emulated FAT file system.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]      BlockNumber  Physical disk block to read from/write to
+ *  \param[in,out]  BlockBuffer  Pointer to the start of the block buffer in RAM
+ *  \param[in]      Read         If \c true, the requested block is read, if
+ *                               \c false, the requested block is written
+ */
+static void ReadWriteFLASHFileBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber,
+                                    uint8_t* BlockBuffer,
+                                    const bool Read)
+{
+	uint16_t FileStartBlock = DISK_BLOCK_DataStartBlock + (*FLASHFileStartCluster - 2) * SECTOR_PER_CLUSTER;
+	uint16_t FileEndBlock   = FileStartBlock + (FILE_SECTORS(FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES) - 1);
+
+	/* Range check the write request - abort if requested block is not within the
+	 * virtual firmware file sector range */
+	if (!((BlockNumber >= FileStartBlock) && (BlockNumber <= FileEndBlock)))
+	  return;
+
+	#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+	uint32_t FlashAddress = (uint32_t)(BlockNumber - FileStartBlock) * SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES;
+	#else
+	uint16_t FlashAddress = (uint16_t)(BlockNumber - FileStartBlock) * SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES;
+	#endif
+
+	if (Read)
+	{
+		/* Read out the mapped block of data from the device's FLASH */
+		for (uint16_t i = 0; i < SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES; i++)
+		{
+			#if (FLASHEND > 0xFFFF)
+			  BlockBuffer[i] = pgm_read_byte_far(FlashAddress++);
+			#else
+			  BlockBuffer[i] = pgm_read_byte(FlashAddress++);
+			#endif
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Write out the mapped block of data to the device's FLASH */
+		for (uint16_t i = 0; i < SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES; i += 2)
+		{
+			if ((FlashAddress % SPM_PAGESIZE) == 0)
+			{
+				/* Erase the given FLASH page, ready to be programmed */
+				BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(FlashAddress);
+			}
+
+			/* Write the next data word to the FLASH page */
+			BootloaderAPI_FillWord(FlashAddress, (BlockBuffer[i + 1] << 8) | BlockBuffer[i]);
+			FlashAddress += 2;
+
+			if ((FlashAddress % SPM_PAGESIZE) == 0)
+			{
+				/* Write the filled FLASH page to memory */
+				BootloaderAPI_WritePage(FlashAddress - SPM_PAGESIZE);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Reads or writes a block of data from/to the physical device EEPROM using a
+ *  block buffer stored in RAM, if the requested block is within the virtual
+ *  firmware file's sector ranges in the emulated FAT file system.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]      BlockNumber  Physical disk block to read from/write to
+ *  \param[in,out]  BlockBuffer  Pointer to the start of the block buffer in RAM
+ *  \param[in]      Read         If \c true, the requested block is read, if
+ *                               \c false, the requested block is written
+ */
+static void ReadWriteEEPROMFileBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber,
+                                     uint8_t* BlockBuffer,
+                                     const bool Read)
+{
+	uint16_t FileStartBlock = DISK_BLOCK_DataStartBlock + (*EEPROMFileStartCluster - 2) * SECTOR_PER_CLUSTER;
+	uint16_t FileEndBlock   = FileStartBlock + (FILE_SECTORS(EEPROM_FILE_SIZE_BYTES) - 1);
+
+	/* Range check the write request - abort if requested block is not within the
+	 * virtual firmware file sector range */
+	if (!((BlockNumber >= FileStartBlock) && (BlockNumber <= FileEndBlock)))
+	  return;
+
+	uint16_t EEPROMAddress = (uint16_t)(BlockNumber - FileStartBlock) * SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES;
+
+	if (Read)
+	{
+		/* Read out the mapped block of data from the device's EEPROM */
+		for (uint16_t i = 0; i < SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES; i++)
+		  BlockBuffer[i] = ReadEEPROMByte((uint8_t*)EEPROMAddress++);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Write out the mapped block of data to the device's EEPROM */
+		for (uint16_t i = 0; i < SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES; i++)
+		  WriteEEPROMByte((uint8_t*)EEPROMAddress++, BlockBuffer[i]);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Writes a block of data to the virtual FAT filesystem, from the USB Mass
+ *  Storage interface.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  BlockNumber  Index of the block to write.
+ */
+void VirtualFAT_WriteBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber)
+{
+	uint8_t BlockBuffer[SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES];
+
+	/* Buffer the entire block to be written from the host */
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(BlockBuffer, sizeof(BlockBuffer), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	switch (BlockNumber)
+	{
+		case DISK_BLOCK_BootBlock:
+		case DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock1:
+		case DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock2:
+			/* Ignore writes to the boot and FAT blocks */
+
+			break;
+
+		case DISK_BLOCK_RootFilesBlock:
+			/* Copy over the updated directory entries */
+			memcpy(FirmwareFileEntries, BlockBuffer, sizeof(FirmwareFileEntries));
+
+			break;
+
+		default:
+			ReadWriteFLASHFileBlock(BlockNumber, BlockBuffer, false);
+			ReadWriteEEPROMFileBlock(BlockNumber, BlockBuffer, false);
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Reads a block of data from the virtual FAT filesystem, and sends it to the
+ *  host via the USB Mass Storage interface.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  BlockNumber  Index of the block to read.
+ */
+void VirtualFAT_ReadBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber)
+{
+	uint8_t BlockBuffer[SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES];
+	memset(BlockBuffer, 0x00, sizeof(BlockBuffer));
+
+	switch (BlockNumber)
+	{
+		case DISK_BLOCK_BootBlock:
+			memcpy(BlockBuffer, &BootBlock, sizeof(FATBootBlock_t));
+
+			/* Add the magic signature to the end of the block */
+			BlockBuffer[SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES - 2] = 0x55;
+			BlockBuffer[SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES - 1] = 0xAA;
+
+			break;
+
+		case DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock1:
+		case DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock2:
+			/* Cluster 0: Media type/Reserved */
+			UpdateFAT12ClusterEntry(BlockBuffer, 0, 0xF00 | BootBlock.MediaDescriptor);
+
+			/* Cluster 1: Reserved */
+			UpdateFAT12ClusterEntry(BlockBuffer, 1, 0xFFF);
+
+			/* Cluster 2 onwards: Cluster chain of FLASH.BIN */
+			UpdateFAT12ClusterChain(BlockBuffer, *FLASHFileStartCluster, FILE_CLUSTERS(FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES));
+
+			/* Cluster 2+n onwards: Cluster chain of EEPROM.BIN */
+			UpdateFAT12ClusterChain(BlockBuffer, *EEPROMFileStartCluster, FILE_CLUSTERS(EEPROM_FILE_SIZE_BYTES));
+
+			break;
+
+		case DISK_BLOCK_RootFilesBlock:
+			memcpy(BlockBuffer, FirmwareFileEntries, sizeof(FirmwareFileEntries));
+
+			break;
+
+		default:
+			ReadWriteFLASHFileBlock(BlockNumber, BlockBuffer, true);
+			ReadWriteEEPROMFileBlock(BlockNumber, BlockBuffer, true);
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the entire read block Buffer to the host */
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(BlockBuffer, sizeof(BlockBuffer), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ea80eae4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/Lib/VirtualFAT.h
@@ -0,0 +1,302 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _VIRTUALFAT_H_
+#define _VIRTUALFAT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../BootloaderAPI.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Size of the virtual FLASH.BIN file in bytes. */
+		#define FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES     (FLASHEND - (FLASHEND - BOOT_START_ADDR) - AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE)
+
+		/** Size of the virtual EEPROM.BIN file in bytes. */
+		#define EEPROM_FILE_SIZE_BYTES    E2END
+
+		/** Number of sectors that comprise a single logical disk cluster. */
+		#define SECTOR_PER_CLUSTER        4
+
+		/** Size of a single logical sector on the disk. */
+		#define SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES         512
+
+		/** Size of a logical cluster on the disk, in bytes */
+		#define CLUSTER_SIZE_BYTES        (SECTOR_PER_CLUSTER * SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES)
+
+		/** Number of sectors required to store a given size in bytes.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] size  Size of the data that needs to be stored
+		 *
+		 *  \return Number of sectors required to store the given data on the disk.
+		 */
+		#define FILE_SECTORS(size)        ((size / SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES)  + ((size % SECTOR_SIZE_BYTES)  ? 1 : 0))
+
+		/** Number of clusters required to store a given size in bytes.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] size  Size of the data that needs to be stored
+		 *
+		 *  \return Number of clusters required to store the given data on the disk.
+		 */
+		#define FILE_CLUSTERS(size)       ((size / CLUSTER_SIZE_BYTES) + ((size % CLUSTER_SIZE_BYTES) ? 1 : 0))
+
+		/** Total number of logical sectors/blocks on the disk. */
+		#define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS          (FILE_SECTORS(FLASH_FILE_SIZE_BYTES) + FILE_SECTORS(EEPROM_FILE_SIZE_BYTES) + 32)
+
+		/** Converts a given time in HH:MM:SS format to a FAT filesystem time.
+		 *
+		 *  \note The minimum seconds resolution of FAT is 2, thus odd seconds
+		 *        will be truncated to the previous integer multiple of 2 seconds.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] hh  Hours (0-23)
+		 *  \param[in] mm  Minutes (0-59)
+		 *  \param[in] ss  Seconds (0-59)
+		 *
+		 *  \return Given time encoded as a FAT filesystem timestamp
+		 */
+		#define FAT_TIME(hh, mm, ss)      ((hh << 11) | (mm << 5) | (ss >> 1))
+
+		/** Converts a given date in DD/MM/YYYY format to a FAT filesystem date.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] dd    Days in the month (1-31)
+		 *  \param[in] mm    Months in the year (1-12)
+		 *  \param[in] yyyy  Year (1980 - 2107)
+		 *
+		 *  \return Given date encoded as a FAT filesystem datestamp
+		 */
+		#define FAT_DATE(dd, mm, yyyy)    (((yyyy - 1980) << 9) | (mm << 5) | (dd << 0))
+
+		/** Bit-rotates a given 8-bit value once to the right.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] x  Value to rotate right once
+		 *
+		 *  \return Bit-rotated input value, rotated once to the right.
+		 */
+		#define ROT8(x)                   ((((x) & 0xFE) >> 1) | (((x) & 1) ? 0x80 : 0x00))
+
+		/** Computes the LFN entry checksum of a MSDOS 8.3 format file entry,
+		 *  to associate a LFN entry with its short file entry.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] n0  MSDOS Filename character 1
+		 *  \param[in] n1  MSDOS Filename character 2
+		 *  \param[in] n2  MSDOS Filename character 3
+		 *  \param[in] n3  MSDOS Filename character 4
+		 *  \param[in] n4  MSDOS Filename character 5
+		 *  \param[in] n5  MSDOS Filename character 6
+		 *  \param[in] n6  MSDOS Filename character 7
+		 *  \param[in] n7  MSDOS Filename character 8
+		 *  \param[in] e0  MSDOS Extension character 1
+		 *  \param[in] e1  MSDOS Extension character 2
+		 *  \param[in] e2  MSDOS Extension character 3
+		 *
+		 *  \return LFN checksum of the given MSDOS 8.3 filename.
+		 */
+		#define FAT_CHECKSUM(n0, n1, n2, n3, n4, n5, n6, n7, e0, e1, e2) \
+		   (uint8_t)(ROT8(ROT8(ROT8(ROT8(ROT8(ROT8(ROT8(ROT8(ROT8(ROT8(n0)+n1)+n2)+n3)+n4)+n5)+n6)+n7)+e0)+e1)+e2)
+
+		/** \name FAT Filesystem Flags */
+		//@{
+		/** FAT attribute flag to indicate a read-only file. */
+		#define FAT_FLAG_READONLY         (1 << 0)
+
+		/** FAT attribute flag to indicate a hidden file. */
+		#define FAT_FLAG_HIDDEN           (1 << 1)
+
+		/** FAT attribute flag to indicate a system file. */
+		#define FAT_FLAG_SYSTEM           (1 << 2)
+
+		/** FAT attribute flag to indicate a Volume name entry. */
+		#define FAT_FLAG_VOLUME_NAME      (1 << 3)
+
+		/** FAT attribute flag to indicate a directory entry. */
+		#define FAT_FLAG_DIRECTORY        (1 << 4)
+
+		/** FAT attribute flag to indicate a file ready for archiving. */
+		#define FAT_FLAG_ARCHIVE          (1 << 5)
+
+		/** FAT pseudo-attribute flag to indicate a Long File Name entry. */
+		#define FAT_FLAG_LONG_FILE_NAME   0x0F
+
+		/** Ordinal flag marker for FAT Long File Name entries to mark the last entry. */
+		#define FAT_ORDINAL_LAST_ENTRY    (1 << 6)
+		//@}
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the Root FAT file entry indexes on the disk. This can be used
+		 *  to retrieve the current contents of a known directory entry.
+		 */
+		enum
+		{
+			/** Volume ID directory entry, giving the name of the virtual disk. */
+			DISK_FILE_ENTRY_VolumeID      = 0,
+			/** Long File Name FAT file entry of the virtual FLASH.BIN image file. */
+			DISK_FILE_ENTRY_FLASH_LFN     = 1,
+			/** Legacy MSDOS FAT file entry of the virtual FLASH.BIN image file. */
+			DISK_FILE_ENTRY_FLASH_MSDOS   = 2,
+			/** Long File Name FAT file entry of the virtual EEPROM.BIN image file. */
+			DISK_FILE_ENTRY_EEPROM_LFN    = 3,
+			/** Legacy MSDOS FAT file entry of the virtual EEPROM.BIN image file. */
+			DISK_FILE_ENTRY_EEPROM_MSDOS  = 4,
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the physical disk blocks of the virtual disk. */
+		enum
+		{
+			/** Boot sector disk block. */
+			DISK_BLOCK_BootBlock          = 0,
+			/** First copy of the FAT table block. */
+			DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock1          = 1,
+			/** Second copy of the FAT table block. */
+			DISK_BLOCK_FATBlock2          = 2,
+			/** Root file and directory entries block. */
+			DISK_BLOCK_RootFilesBlock     = 3,
+			/** Start block of the disk data section. */
+			DISK_BLOCK_DataStartBlock     = 4,
+		};
+
+	/* Type Definitions: */
+		/** FAT boot block structure definition, used to identify the core
+		 *  parameters of a FAT file system stored on a disk.
+		 *
+		 *  \note This definition is truncated to save space; the magic signature
+		 *        \c 0xAA55 must be appended to the very end of the block for it
+		 *        to be detected by the host as a valid boot block.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  Bootstrap[3];
+			uint8_t  Description[8];
+			uint16_t SectorSize;
+			uint8_t  SectorsPerCluster;
+			uint16_t ReservedSectors;
+			uint8_t  FATCopies;
+			uint16_t RootDirectoryEntries;
+			uint16_t TotalSectors16;
+			uint8_t  MediaDescriptor;
+			uint16_t SectorsPerFAT;
+			uint16_t SectorsPerTrack;
+			uint16_t Heads;
+			uint32_t HiddenSectors;
+			uint32_t TotalSectors32;
+			uint16_t PhysicalDriveNum;
+			uint8_t  ExtendedBootRecordSig;
+			uint32_t VolumeSerialNumber;
+			uint8_t  VolumeLabel[11];
+			uint8_t  FilesystemIdentifier[8];
+			/* uint8_t  BootstrapProgram[448]; */
+			/* uint16_t MagicSignature; */
+		} FATBootBlock_t;
+
+		/** FAT directory entry structure, for the various kinds of File and
+		 *  directory descriptors on a FAT disk.
+		 */
+		typedef union
+		{
+			/** VFAT Long File Name file entry. */
+			struct
+			{
+				uint8_t  Ordinal;
+				uint16_t Unicode1;
+				uint16_t Unicode2;
+				uint16_t Unicode3;
+				uint16_t Unicode4;
+				uint16_t Unicode5;
+				uint8_t  Attribute;
+				uint8_t  Reserved1;
+				uint8_t  Checksum;
+				uint16_t Unicode6;
+				uint16_t Unicode7;
+				uint16_t Unicode8;
+				uint16_t Unicode9;
+				uint16_t Unicode10;
+				uint16_t Unicode11;
+				uint16_t Reserved2;
+				uint16_t Unicode12;
+				uint16_t Unicode13;
+			} VFAT_LongFileName;
+
+			/** Legacy FAT MSDOS 8.3 file entry. */
+			struct
+			{
+				uint8_t  Filename[8];
+				uint8_t  Extension[3];
+				uint8_t  Attributes;
+				uint8_t  Reserved[10];
+				uint16_t CreationTime;
+				uint16_t CreationDate;
+				uint16_t StartingCluster;
+				uint32_t FileSizeBytes;
+			} MSDOS_File;
+
+			/** Legacy FAT MSDOS (sub-)directory entry. */
+			struct
+			{
+				uint8_t  Name[11];
+				uint8_t  Attributes;
+				uint8_t  Reserved[10];
+				uint16_t CreationTime;
+				uint16_t CreationDate;
+				uint16_t StartingCluster;
+				uint32_t Reserved2;
+			} MSDOS_Directory;
+		} FATDirectoryEntry_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_VIRTUAL_FAT_C)
+			static uint8_t ReadEEPROMByte(const uint8_t* const Address) ATTR_NO_INLINE;
+
+			static void WriteEEPROMByte(uint8_t* const Address,
+			                            const uint8_t Data) ATTR_NO_INLINE;
+
+			static void UpdateFAT12ClusterEntry(uint8_t* const FATTable,
+			                                    const uint16_t Index,
+			                                    const uint16_t ChainEntry) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+			static void UpdateFAT12ClusterChain(uint8_t* const FATTable,
+			                                    const uint16_t StartIndex,
+			                                    const uint8_t ChainLength) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+			static void ReadWriteFLASHFileBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber,
+			                                    uint8_t* BlockBuffer,
+			                                    const bool Read) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+			static void ReadWriteEEPROMFileBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber,
+			                                     uint8_t* BlockBuffer,
+			                                     const bool Read) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+		#endif
+
+		void VirtualFAT_WriteBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+		void VirtualFAT_ReadBlock(const uint16_t BlockNumber) AUX_BOOT_SECTION;
+
+#endif
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..700ffa26f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+	<project caption="Mass Storage Bootloader - 128KB FLASH / 8KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage.avr8.128_8" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_ms_128kb_8kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1E000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1E000"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE" value="0"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FFA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FFE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FFF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="Mass Storage Bootloader - 64KB FLASH / 8KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage.avr8.64_8" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_ms_64kb_8kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="at90usb647"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0xE000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0xE000"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE" value="0"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0xFFA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0xFFE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0xFFF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="Mass Storage Bootloader - 32KB FLASH / 4KB Boot (2KB AUX) - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage.avr8.32_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_ms_32kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x7000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x7000"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE" value="2048"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.boot_aux=0x6810"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.boot_aux_trampoline=0x6800"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=Boot_AUX_Trampoline"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x7FA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x7FE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x7FF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="Mass Storage Bootloader - 16KB FLASH / 4KB Boot (2KB AUX) - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage.avr8.16_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_ms_16kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="atmega16u2"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x3000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x3000"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE" value="2048"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.boot_aux=0x2810"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.boot_aux_trampoline=0x2800"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=Boot_AUX_Trampoline"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x3FA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x3FE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x3FF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<module type="application" id="lufa.bootloaders.mass_storage" caption="Mass Storage Bootloader">
+		<info type="description" value="summary">
+		Mass Storage Class Bootloader, capable of reprogramming a device via binary BIN files copied to the virtual FAT12 file-system it creates when plugged into a host.
+		</info>
+
+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+			<keyword value="Bootloaders"/>
+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>
+		</info>
+
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+		<build type="include-path" value="."/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderMassStorage.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderMassStorage.h"/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderAPI.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderAPI.h"/>
+		<build type="asm-source" value="BootloaderAPITable.S"/>
+
+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>
+
+		<build type="include-path" value="Lib"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/VirtualFAT.h"/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/VirtualFAT.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/SCSI.h"/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/SCSI.c"/>
+
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="BootloaderMassStorage.txt"/>
+
+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+	</module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..795c6e81a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2396 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.9
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Class Bootloader"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included
+# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55
+# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy
+# the logo to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new
+# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part
+# of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or
+# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO,
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option
+# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will
+# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to
+# YES the compound reference will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo
+# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test
+# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete
+# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty,
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated
+# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated
+# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty
+# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred
+# to HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created
+# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen
+# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code
+# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_SOURCE_CODE        = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an
+# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the
+# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is
+# still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM \
+                         ATTR_NO_INIT
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in
+# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by
+# the !include statement in a plantuml block.
+
+PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH  =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/makefile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f3948e754
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/MassStorage/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = BootloaderMassStorage
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c BootloaderAPI.c BootloaderAPITable.S Lib/SCSI.c Lib/VirtualFAT.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET)
+LD_FLAGS     = -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) $(BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS)
+
+# Flash size and bootloader section sizes of the target, in KB. These must
+# match the target's total FLASH size and the bootloader size set in the
+# device's fuses.
+FLASH_SIZE_KB         = 128
+BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB  = 8
+
+# Bootloader address calculation formulas
+# Do not modify these macros, but rather modify the dependent values above.
+CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX   = $(shell printf "0x%X" $$(( $(1) )) )
+BOOT_START_OFFSET     = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 )
+BOOT_SEC_OFFSET       = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) * 1024) - ($(strip $(1))) )
+
+# Bootloader linker section flags for relocating the API table sections to
+# known FLASH addresses - these should not normally be user-edited.
+BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG  = -Wl,--section-start=$(strip $(1))=$(call BOOT_SEC_OFFSET, $(3)) -Wl,--undefined=$(strip $(2))
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS     = $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_trampolines, BootloaderAPI_Trampolines, 96)
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS    += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_jumptable,   BootloaderAPI_JumpTable,   32)
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS    += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_signatures,  BootloaderAPI_Signatures,  8)
+
+# Check if the bootloader needs an AUX section, located before the real bootloader section to store some of the
+# bootloader code. This is required for 32KB and smaller devices, where the actual bootloader is 6KB but the maximum
+# bootloader section size is 4KB. The actual usable application space will be reduced by 6KB for these devices.
+ifeq ($(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB),8)
+  CC_FLAGS           += -DAUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE=0
+else
+  AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB = (6 - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB))
+
+  CC_FLAGS           += -DAUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE='($(AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB) * 1024)'
+  LD_FLAGS           += -Wl,--section-start=.boot_aux=$(call BOOT_SEC_OFFSET, (($(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB) + $(AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 - 16))
+  LD_FLAGS           += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .boot_aux_trampoline, Boot_AUX_Trampoline, ($(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB) + $(AUX_BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024)
+endif
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules
+DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA
+include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk
+include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk
+
+# Include common DMBS build system modules
+DMBS_PATH      ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2be156808
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Bootloader user application API functions.
+ */
+
+#include "BootloaderAPI.h"
+
+void BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	boot_page_erase_safe(Address);
+	boot_spm_busy_wait();
+	boot_rww_enable();
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	boot_page_write_safe(Address);
+	boot_spm_busy_wait();
+	boot_rww_enable();
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word)
+{
+	boot_page_fill_safe(Address, Word);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	return boot_signature_byte_get(Address);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(Address);
+}
+
+uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void)
+{
+	return boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_LOCK_BITS);
+}
+
+void BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits)
+{
+	boot_lock_bits_set_safe(LockBits);
+}
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c2d9b4a18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderAPI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_API_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADER_API_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/boot.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    BootloaderAPI_ErasePage(const uint32_t Address);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_WritePage(const uint32_t Address);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_FillWord(const uint32_t Address, const uint16_t Word);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature(const uint16_t Address);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse(const uint16_t Address);
+		uint8_t BootloaderAPI_ReadLock(void);
+		void    BootloaderAPI_WriteLock(const uint8_t LockBits);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPITable.S b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPITable.S
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d8358c31c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderAPITable.S
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+; Trampolines to actual API implementations if the target address is outside the
+; range of a rjmp instruction (can happen with large bootloader sections)
+.section .apitable_trampolines, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_Trampolines
+BootloaderAPI_Trampolines:
+
+	BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage
+	BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage
+	BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse
+	BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock
+	BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline:
+		jmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4:
+		ret
+	BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5:
+		ret
+
+
+
+; API function jump table
+.section .apitable_jumptable, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_JumpTable
+BootloaderAPI_JumpTable:
+
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ErasePage_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_WritePage_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_FillWord_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_ReadLock_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_WriteLock_Trampoline
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED1 ; UNUSED ENTRY 1
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED2 ; UNUSED ENTRY 2
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED3 ; UNUSED ENTRY 3
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED4 ; UNUSED ENTRY 4
+	rjmp BootloaderAPI_UNUSED5 ; UNUSED ENTRY 5
+
+
+
+; Bootloader table signatures and information
+.section .apitable_signatures, "ax"
+.global BootloaderAPI_Signatures
+BootloaderAPI_Signatures:
+
+	.long BOOT_START_ADDR ; Start address of the bootloader
+	.word 0xDF20 ; Signature for the Printer class bootloader
+	.word 0xDCFB ; Signature for a LUFA class bootloader
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9021f998f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.c
@@ -0,0 +1,487 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Printer class bootloader. This file contains the complete bootloader logic.
+ */
+
+#include "BootloaderPrinter.h"
+
+/** LUFA Printer Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Printer Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_PRNT_Device_t TextOnly_Printer_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_Printer,
+				.DataINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = PRINTER_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = PRINTER_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = PRINTER_OUT_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = PRINTER_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.IEEE1284String =
+					"MFG:Generic;"
+					"MDL:Generic_/_Text_Only;"
+					"CMD:1284.4;"
+					"CLS:PRINTER",
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Intel HEX parser state machine state information, to track the contents of
+ *  a HEX file streamed in as a sequence of arbitrary bytes.
+ */
+struct
+{
+	/** Current HEX parser state machine state. */
+	uint8_t  ParserState;
+	/** Previously decoded numerical byte of data. */
+	uint8_t  PrevData;
+	/** Currently decoded numerical byte of data. */
+	uint8_t  Data;
+	/** Indicates if both bytes that correspond to a single decoded numerical
+	 *  byte of data (HEX encodes values in ASCII HEX, two characters per byte)
+	 *  have been read.
+	 */
+	bool     ReadMSB;
+	/** Intel HEX record type of the current Intel HEX record. */
+	uint8_t  RecordType;
+	/** Numerical bytes of data remaining to be read in the current record. */
+	uint8_t  DataRem;
+	/** Checksum of the current record received so far. */
+	uint8_t  Checksum;
+	/** Starting address of the last addressed FLASH page. */
+	uint32_t PageStartAddress;
+	/** Current 32-bit byte extended base address in FLASH being targeted. */
+	uint32_t CurrBaseAddress;
+	/** Current 32-bit byte address in FLASH being targeted. */
+	uint32_t CurrAddress;
+} HEXParser;
+
+/** Indicates if there is data waiting to be written to a physical page of
+ *  memory in FLASH.
+ */
+static bool PageDirty = false;
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the bootloader should be running, or should exit and allow the application code to run
+ *  via a soft reset. When cleared, the bootloader will abort, the USB interface will shut down and the application
+ *  started via a forced watchdog reset.
+ */
+static bool RunBootloader = true;
+
+/** Magic lock for forced application start. If the HWBE fuse is programmed and BOOTRST is unprogrammed, the bootloader
+ *  will start if the /HWB line of the AVR is held low and the system is reset. However, if the /HWB line is still held
+ *  low when the application attempts to start via a watchdog reset, the bootloader will re-start. If set to the value
+ *  \ref MAGIC_BOOT_KEY the special init function \ref Application_Jump_Check() will force the application to start.
+ */
+uint16_t MagicBootKey ATTR_NO_INIT;
+
+
+/** Special startup routine to check if the bootloader was started via a watchdog reset, and if the magic application
+ *  start key has been loaded into \ref MagicBootKey. If the bootloader started via the watchdog and the key is valid,
+ *  this will force the user application to start via a software jump.
+ */
+void Application_Jump_Check(void)
+{
+	bool JumpToApplication = false;
+
+	#if (BOARD == BOARD_LEONARDO)
+		/* Enable pull-up on the IO13 pin so we can use it to select the mode */
+		PORTC |= (1 << 7);
+		Delay_MS(10);
+
+		/* If IO13 is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */
+		JumpToApplication = ((PINC & (1 << 7)) != 0);
+
+		/* Disable pull-up after the check has completed */
+		PORTC &= ~(1 << 7);
+	#elif ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+		/* Disable JTAG debugging */
+		JTAG_DISABLE();
+
+		/* Enable pull-up on the JTAG TCK pin so we can use it to select the mode */
+		PORTF |= (1 << 4);
+		Delay_MS(10);
+
+		/* If the TCK pin is not jumpered to ground, start the user application instead */
+		JumpToApplication = ((PINF & (1 << 4)) != 0);
+
+		/* Re-enable JTAG debugging */
+		JTAG_ENABLE();
+	#else
+		/* Check if the device's BOOTRST fuse is set */
+		if (boot_lock_fuse_bits_get(GET_HIGH_FUSE_BITS) & FUSE_BOOTRST)
+		{
+			/* If the reset source was not an external reset or the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application */
+			if (!(MCUSR & (1 << EXTRF)) || (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
+			  JumpToApplication = true;
+
+			/* Clear reset source */
+			MCUSR &= ~(1 << EXTRF);
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			/* If the reset source was the bootloader and the key is correct, clear it and jump to the application;
+			 * this can happen in the HWBE fuse is set, and the HBE pin is low during the watchdog reset */
+			if ((MCUSR & (1 << WDRF)) && (MagicBootKey == MAGIC_BOOT_KEY))
+				JumpToApplication = true;
+
+			/* Clear reset source */
+			MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+		}
+	#endif
+
+	/* Don't run the user application if the reset vector is blank (no app loaded) */
+	bool ApplicationValid = (pgm_read_word_near(0) != 0xFFFF);
+
+	/* If a request has been made to jump to the user application, honor it */
+	if (JumpToApplication && ApplicationValid)
+	{
+		/* Turn off the watchdog */
+		MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+		wdt_disable();
+
+		/* Clear the boot key and jump to the user application */
+		MagicBootKey = 0;
+
+		// cppcheck-suppress constStatement
+		((void (*)(void))0x0000)();
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * Converts a given input byte of data from an ASCII encoded HEX value to an integer value.
+ *
+ * \note Input HEX bytes are expected to be in uppercase only.
+ *
+ * \param[in] Byte  ASCII byte of data to convert
+ *
+ * \return Integer converted value of the input ASCII encoded HEX byte of data, or -1 if the
+ *         input is not valid ASCII encoded HEX.
+ */
+static int8_t HexToDecimal(const char Byte)
+{
+	if ((Byte >= 'A') && (Byte <= 'F'))
+	  return (10 + (Byte - 'A'));
+	else if ((Byte >= '0') && (Byte <= '9'))
+	  return (Byte - '0');
+
+	return -1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Flushes a partially written page of data to physical FLASH, if a page
+ * boundary has been crossed.
+ *
+ * \note If a page flush occurs the global HEX parser state is updated.
+ */
+static void FlushPageIfRequired(void)
+{
+	/* Abort if no data has been buffered for writing to the current page */
+	if (!PageDirty)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Flush the FLASH page to physical memory if we are crossing a page boundary */
+	uint32_t NewPageStartAddress = (HEXParser.CurrAddress & ~(SPM_PAGESIZE - 1));
+	if (HEXParser.PageStartAddress != NewPageStartAddress)
+	{
+		boot_page_write(HEXParser.PageStartAddress);
+		boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+		HEXParser.PageStartAddress = NewPageStartAddress;
+
+		PageDirty = false;
+	}
+}
+
+/**
+ * Parses an input Intel HEX formatted stream one character at a time, loading
+ * the data contents into the device's internal FLASH memory.
+ *
+ * \param[in] ReadCharacter  Next input ASCII byte of data to parse
+ */
+static void ParseIntelHEXByte(const char ReadCharacter)
+{
+	/* Reset the line parser while waiting for a new line to start */
+	if ((HEXParser.ParserState == HEX_PARSE_STATE_WAIT_LINE) || (ReadCharacter == ':'))
+	{
+		HEXParser.Checksum     = 0;
+		HEXParser.CurrAddress  = HEXParser.CurrBaseAddress;
+		HEXParser.ReadMSB      = false;
+
+		/* ASCII ':' indicates the start of a new HEX record */
+		if (ReadCharacter == ':')
+		  HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_BYTE_COUNT;
+
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Only allow ASCII HEX encoded digits, ignore all other characters */
+	int8_t ReadCharacterDec = HexToDecimal(ReadCharacter);
+	if (ReadCharacterDec < 0)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Read and convert the next nibble of data from the current character */
+	HEXParser.Data    = (HEXParser.Data << 4) | ReadCharacterDec;
+	HEXParser.ReadMSB = !HEXParser.ReadMSB;
+
+	/* Only process further when a full byte (two nibbles) have been read */
+	if (HEXParser.ReadMSB)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Intel HEX checksum is for all fields except starting character and the
+	 * checksum itself
+	 */
+	if (HEXParser.ParserState != HEX_PARSE_STATE_CHECKSUM)
+	  HEXParser.Checksum += HEXParser.Data;
+
+	switch (HEXParser.ParserState)
+	{
+		case HEX_PARSE_STATE_BYTE_COUNT:
+			HEXParser.DataRem      = HEXParser.Data;
+			HEXParser.ParserState  = HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_HIGH;
+			break;
+
+		case HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_HIGH:
+			HEXParser.CurrAddress += ((uint16_t)HEXParser.Data << 8);
+			HEXParser.ParserState  = HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_LOW;
+			break;
+
+		case HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_LOW:
+			HEXParser.CurrAddress += HEXParser.Data;
+			HEXParser.ParserState  = HEX_PARSE_STATE_RECORD_TYPE;
+			break;
+
+		case HEX_PARSE_STATE_RECORD_TYPE:
+			HEXParser.RecordType   = HEXParser.Data;
+			HEXParser.ParserState  = (HEXParser.DataRem ? HEX_PARSE_STATE_READ_DATA : HEX_PARSE_STATE_CHECKSUM);
+			break;
+
+		case HEX_PARSE_STATE_READ_DATA:
+			/* Track the number of read data bytes in the record */
+			HEXParser.DataRem--;
+
+			/* Protect the bootloader against being written to */
+			if (HEXParser.CurrAddress >= BOOT_START_ADDR)
+			{
+				HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_WAIT_LINE;
+				PageDirty = false;
+				return;
+			}
+
+			/* Wait for a machine word (two bytes) of data to be read */
+			if (HEXParser.DataRem & 0x01)
+			{
+				HEXParser.PrevData = HEXParser.Data;
+				break;
+			}
+
+			/* Convert the last two received data bytes into a 16-bit word */
+			uint16_t NewDataWord = ((uint16_t)HEXParser.Data << 8) | HEXParser.PrevData;
+
+			switch (HEXParser.RecordType)
+			{
+				case HEX_RECORD_TYPE_Data:
+					/* If we are writing to a new page, we need to erase it first */
+					if (!(PageDirty))
+					{
+						boot_page_erase(HEXParser.PageStartAddress);
+						boot_spm_busy_wait();
+
+						PageDirty = true;
+					}
+
+					/* Fill the FLASH memory buffer with the new word of data */
+					boot_page_fill(HEXParser.CurrAddress, NewDataWord);
+					HEXParser.CurrAddress += 2;
+
+					/* Flush the FLASH page to physical memory if we are crossing a page boundary */
+					FlushPageIfRequired();
+					break;
+
+				case HEX_RECORD_TYPE_ExtendedSegmentAddress:
+					/* Extended address data - store the upper 12-bits of the new address */
+					HEXParser.CurrBaseAddress = ((uint32_t)NewDataWord << 4);
+					break;
+
+				case HEX_RECORD_TYPE_ExtendedLinearAddress:
+					/* Extended address data - store the upper 16-bits of the new address */
+					HEXParser.CurrBaseAddress = ((uint32_t)NewDataWord << 16);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			if (!HEXParser.DataRem)
+			  HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_CHECKSUM;
+			break;
+
+		case HEX_PARSE_STATE_CHECKSUM:
+			/* Verify checksum of the completed record */
+			if (HEXParser.Data != ((~HEXParser.Checksum + 1) & 0xFF))
+			  break;
+
+			/* Flush the FLASH page to physical memory if we are crossing a page boundary */
+			FlushPageIfRequired();
+
+			/* If end of the HEX file reached, the bootloader should exit at next opportunity */
+			if (HEXParser.RecordType == HEX_RECORD_TYPE_EndOfFile)
+			  RunBootloader = false;
+
+			break;
+
+		default:
+			HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_WAIT_LINE;
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	while (RunBootloader)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesReceived = PRNT_Device_BytesReceived(&TextOnly_Printer_Interface);
+
+		if (BytesReceived)
+		{
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+			while (BytesReceived--)
+			{
+				int16_t ReceivedByte = PRNT_Device_ReceiveByte(&TextOnly_Printer_Interface);
+
+				/* Feed the next byte of data to the HEX parser */
+				ParseIntelHEXByte(ReceivedByte);
+			}
+
+			LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+		}
+
+		PRNT_Device_USBTask(&TextOnly_Printer_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+
+	/* Disconnect from the host - USB interface will be reset later along with the AVR */
+	USB_Detach();
+
+	/* Unlock the forced application start mode of the bootloader if it is restarted */
+	MagicBootKey = MAGIC_BOOT_KEY;
+
+	/* Enable the watchdog and force a timeout to reset the AVR */
+	wdt_enable(WDTO_250MS);
+
+	for (;;);
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+static void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Relocate the interrupt vector table to the bootloader section */
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVCE);
+	MCUCR = (1 << IVSEL);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Bootloader active LED toggle timer initialization */
+	TIMSK1 = (1 << TOIE1);
+	TCCR1B = ((1 << CS11) | (1 << CS10));
+}
+
+/** ISR to periodically toggle the LEDs on the board to indicate that the bootloader is active. */
+ISR(TIMER1_OVF_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB enumerating */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the Printer management task.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	/* Indicate USB not ready */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the Mass Storage management task started.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup Printer Data Endpoints */
+	ConfigSuccess &= PRNT_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&TextOnly_Printer_Interface);
+
+	/* Reset the HEX parser upon successful connection to a host */
+	HEXParser.ParserState = HEX_PARSE_STATE_WAIT_LINE;
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	PRNT_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&TextOnly_Printer_Interface);
+}
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8bc1a6879
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.h
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for BootloaderPrinter.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BOOTLOADER_PRINTER_H_
+#define _BOOTLOADER_PRINTER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if !defined(__OPTIMIZE_SIZE__)
+			#error This bootloader requires that it be optimized for size, not speed, to fit into the target device. Change optimization settings and try again.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY       LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING   (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY         (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR         (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY           LEDS_LED2
+
+		/** Magic bootloader key to unlock forced application start mode. */
+		#define MAGIC_BOOT_KEY             0xDC42
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Intel HEX parser state machine states. */
+		enum HEX_Parser_States_t
+		{
+			HEX_PARSE_STATE_WAIT_LINE,    /**< Parser is waiting for a HEX Start of Line character. */
+			HEX_PARSE_STATE_BYTE_COUNT,   /**< Parser is waiting for a record byte count. */
+			HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_HIGH, /**< Parser is waiting for the MSB of a record address. */
+			HEX_PARSE_STATE_ADDRESS_LOW,  /**< Parser is waiting for the LSB of a record address. */
+			HEX_PARSE_STATE_RECORD_TYPE,  /**< Parser is waiting for the record type. */
+			HEX_PARSE_STATE_READ_DATA,    /**< Parser is waiting for more data in the current record. */
+			HEX_PARSE_STATE_CHECKSUM,     /**< Parser is waiting for the checksum of the current record. */
+		};
+
+		/** Intel HEX record types, used to indicate the type of record contained in a line of a HEX file. */
+		enum HEX_Record_Types_t
+		{
+			HEX_RECORD_TYPE_Data                   = 0, /**< Record contains loadable data. */
+			HEX_RECORD_TYPE_EndOfFile              = 1, /**< End of file record. */
+			HEX_RECORD_TYPE_ExtendedSegmentAddress = 2, /**< Extended segment start record. */
+			HEX_RECORD_TYPE_StartSegmentAddress    = 3, /**< Normal segment start record. */
+			HEX_RECORD_TYPE_ExtendedLinearAddress  = 4, /**< Extended linear address start record. */
+			HEX_RECORD_TYPE_StartLinearAddress     = 5, /**< Linear address start record. */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		static void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.txt b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d9aa79686
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/BootloaderPrinter.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,202 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Printer Class USB AVR Bootloader
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Printer Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Printer Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Printer Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  This bootloader enumerates to the host as a Generic Text Only Printer device, capable of reading and parsing
+ *  "printed" plain-text Intel HEX files to load firmware onto the AVR.
+ *
+ *  Out of the box this bootloader builds for the AT90USB1287 with an 8KB bootloader section size, and will fit
+ *  into 4KB of bootloader space. If you wish to alter this size and/or change the AVR model, you will need to
+ *  edit the MCU, FLASH_SIZE_KB and BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB values in the accompanying makefile.
+ *
+ *  When the bootloader is running, the board's LED(s) will flash at regular intervals to distinguish the
+ *  bootloader from the normal user application.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Running Running the Bootloader
+ *
+ *  On the USB AVR8 devices, setting the \c HWBE device fuse will cause the bootloader to run if the \c HWB pin of
+ *  the AVR is grounded when the device is reset.
+ *
+ *  The are two behaviours of this bootloader, depending on the device's fuses:
+ *
+ *  <b>If the device's BOOTRST fuse is set</b>, the bootloader will run any time the system is reset from
+ *  the external reset pin, unless no valid user application has been loaded. To initiate the bootloader, the
+ *  device's external reset pin should be grounded momentarily.
+ *
+ *  <b>If the device's BOOTRST fuse is not set</b>, the bootloader will run only if initiated via a software
+ *  jump, or if the \c HWB pin was low during the last device reset (if the \c HWBE fuse is set).
+ *
+ *  For board specific exceptions to the above, see below.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_XPLAIN Atmel Xplain Board
+ *  Ground the USB AVR JTAG's \c TCK pin to ground when powering on the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the
+ *  \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_Leonardo Arduino Leonardo Board
+ *  Ground \c IO13 when powering the board to start the bootloader. This assumes the \c HWBE fuse is cleared and the
+ *  \c BOOTRST fuse is set as the HWBE pin is not user accessible on this board.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Installation Driver Installation
+ *
+ *  This bootloader uses the Generic Text-Only printer drivers inbuilt into all modern operating systems, thus no
+ *  additional drivers need to be supplied for correct operation.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_HostApp Host Controller Application
+ *
+ *  This bootloader is compatible with Notepad under Windows, and the command line \c lpr utility under Linux.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_Notepad Notepad (Windows)
+ *
+ *  While most text applications under Windows will be compatible with the bootloader, the inbuilt Notepad utility
+ *  is recommended as it will introduce minimal formatting changes to the output stream. To program with Notepad,
+ *  open the target HEX file and print it to the Generic Text Only printer device the bootloader creates.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_LPR LPR (Linux)
+ *
+ *  While the CUPS framework under Linux will enumerate the bootloader as a Generic Text-Only printer, many
+ *  applications will refuse to print to the device due to the lack of rich formatting options available. As a result,
+ *  under Linux HEX files must be printed via the low level \c lpr utility instead.
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  cat Mouse.hex | lpr
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_API User Application API
+ *
+ *  Several user application functions for FLASH and other special memory area manipulations are exposed by the bootloader,
+ *  allowing the user application to call into the bootloader at runtime to read and write FLASH data.
+ *
+ *  By default, the bootloader API jump table is located 32 bytes from the end of the device's FLASH memory, and follows the
+ *  following layout:
+ *
+ *  \code
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE          32
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START         ((FLASHEND + 1UL) - BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE)
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(Index)         (void*)((BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (Index * 2)) / 2)
+ *
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_ErasePage)(uint32_t Address)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(0);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_WritePage)(uint32_t Address)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(1);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_FillWord)(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Word) = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(2);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadSignature)(uint16_t Address)           = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(3);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadFuse)(uint16_t Address)                = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(4);
+ *  uint8_t (*BootloaderAPI_ReadLock)(void)                            = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(5);
+ *  void    (*BootloaderAPI_WriteLock)(uint8_t LockBits)               = BOOTLOADER_API_CALL(6);
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START   (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 2))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE         0xDCFB
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START   (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 4))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_PRINTER_SIGNATURE       0xDF20
+ *
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START           (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_START + (BOOTLOADER_API_TABLE_SIZE - 8))
+ *  #define BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_LENGTH          4
+ *  \endcode
+ *
+ *  From the application the API support of the bootloader can be detected by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address
+ *  \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them to the value \c BOOTLOADER_MAGIC_SIGNATURE. The class of bootloader
+ *  can be determined by reading the FLASH memory bytes located at address \c BOOTLOADER_CLASS_SIGNATURE_START and comparing them
+ *  to the value \c BOOTLOADER_PRINTER_SIGNATURE. The start address of the bootloader can be retrieved by reading the bytes of FLASH
+ *  memory starting from address \c BOOTLOADER_ADDRESS_START.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_API_MemLayout Device Memory Map
+ *  The following illustration indicates the final memory map of the device when loaded with the bootloader.
+ *
+ *  \verbatim
+ *  +----------------------------+ 0x0000
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |      User Application      |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - BOOT_SECTION_SIZE
+ *  |                            |
+ *  |   Bootloader Application   |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  |                            |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 96
+ *  |   API Table Trampolines    |
+ *  | (Not User App. Accessible) |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 32
+ *  |    Bootloader API Table    |
+ *  |   (User App. Accessible)   |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND - 8
+ *  |   Bootloader ID Constants  |
+ *  |   (User App. Accessible)   |
+ *  +----------------------------+ FLASHEND
+ *  \endverbatim
+ *
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues:
+ *
+ *  \par On Linux machines, new firmware fails to be sent to the device via CUPS.
+ *  Only a limited subset of normal printer functionality is exposed via the
+ *  bootloader, causing CUPS to reject print requests from applications that
+ *  are unable to handle true plain-text printing. For best results, the low
+ *  level \c lpr command should be used to print new firmware to the bootloader.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5aa0e765b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..99625d605
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x206B,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.Printer_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Printer,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = PRNT_CSCP_PrinterClass,
+			.SubClass               = PRNT_CSCP_PrinterSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = PRNT_CSCP_BidirectionalProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Printer_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = PRINTER_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = PRINTER_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.Printer_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = PRINTER_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = PRINTER_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in SRAM memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Printer Bootloader");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint16_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = LanguageString.Header.Size;
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = ManufacturerString.Header.Size;
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = ProductString.Header.Size;
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..adb0dddb6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2017  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Printer device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define PRINTER_IN_EPADDR         (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Printer host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define PRINTER_OUT_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Printer data endpoints. */
+		#define PRINTER_IO_EPSIZE         64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Printer Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            Printer_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             Printer_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             Printer_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_Printer = 0, /**< Printer interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint16_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b5c0c6b3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+	<project caption="Printer Bootloader - 128KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer.avr8.128_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_printer_128kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.printer"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1F000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1F000"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FFA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FFE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FFF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="Printer Bootloader - 64KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer.avr8.64_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_printer_64kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.printer"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="at90usb647"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0xF000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0xF000"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0xFFA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0xFFE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0xFFF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="Printer Bootloader - 32KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer.avr8.32_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_printer_32kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.printer"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="atmega32u4"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x7000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x7000"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x7FA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x7FE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x7FF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="Printer Bootloader - 16KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer.avr8.16_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_printer_16kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.printer"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="atmega16u2"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x3000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x3000"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x3FA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x3FE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x3FF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<project caption="Printer Bootloader - 8KB FLASH / 4KB Boot - AVR8 Architecture" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer.avr8.8_4" force-caption="true" workspace-name="lufa_printer_8kb_4kb_">
+		<require idref="lufa.bootloaders.printer"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+		<generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+		<device-support value="atmega8u2"/>
+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="none"/>
+
+		<config name="config.compiler.optimization.level" value="size"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="16000000UL"/>
+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="16000000UL"/>
+
+		<build type="define" name="BOOT_START_ADDR" value="0x1000"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.text=0x1000"/>
+
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_trampolines=0x1FA0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Trampolines"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_jumptable=0x1FE0"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_JumpTable"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--section-start=.apitable_signatures=0x1FF8"/>
+		<build type="linker-config" subtype="flags" value="--undefined=BootloaderAPI_Signatures"/>
+	</project>
+
+	<module type="application" id="lufa.bootloaders.printer" caption="Printer Bootloader">
+		<info type="description" value="summary">
+		Printer Class Bootloader, capable of reprogramming a device by "printing" new HEX files to the virtual Plain-Text printer it creates when plugged into a host.
+		</info>
+
+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+			<keyword value="Bootloaders"/>
+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>
+		</info>
+
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+		<build type="include-path" value="."/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderPrinter.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderPrinter.h"/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+		<build type="c-source" value="BootloaderAPI.c"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="BootloaderAPI.h"/>
+		<build type="asm-source" value="BootloaderAPITable.S"/>
+
+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="BootloaderPrinter.txt"/>
+
+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+	</module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0f96bb9b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2396 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.9
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Printer Class Bootloader"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included
+# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55
+# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy
+# the logo to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new
+# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part
+# of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or
+# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO,
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option
+# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will
+# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to
+# YES the compound reference will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo
+# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test
+# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete
+# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty,
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated
+# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated
+# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty
+# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred
+# to HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created
+# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen
+# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code
+# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_SOURCE_CODE        = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an
+# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the
+# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is
+# still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM \
+                         ATTR_NO_INIT
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in
+# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by
+# the !include statement in a plantuml block.
+
+PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH  =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/makefile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1de35bba0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/Printer/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = BootloaderPrinter
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c BootloaderAPI.c BootloaderAPITable.S $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -DBOOT_START_ADDR=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET)
+LD_FLAGS     = -Wl,--section-start=.text=$(BOOT_START_OFFSET) $(BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS)
+
+# Flash size and bootloader section sizes of the target, in KB. These must
+# match the target's total FLASH size and the bootloader size set in the
+# device's fuses.
+FLASH_SIZE_KB         = 128
+BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB  = 8
+
+# Bootloader address calculation formulas
+# Do not modify these macros, but rather modify the dependent values above.
+CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX   = $(shell printf "0x%X" $$(( $(1) )) )
+BOOT_START_OFFSET     = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) - $(BOOT_SECTION_SIZE_KB)) * 1024 )
+BOOT_SEC_OFFSET       = $(call CALC_ADDRESS_IN_HEX, ($(FLASH_SIZE_KB) * 1024) - ($(strip $(1))) )
+
+# Bootloader linker section flags for relocating the API table sections to
+# known FLASH addresses - these should not normally be user-edited.
+BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG  = -Wl,--section-start=$(strip $(1))=$(call BOOT_SEC_OFFSET, $(3)) -Wl,--undefined=$(strip $(2))
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS     = $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_trampolines, BootloaderAPI_Trampolines, 96)
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS    += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_jumptable,   BootloaderAPI_JumpTable,   32)
+BOOT_API_LD_FLAGS    += $(call BOOT_SECTION_LD_FLAG, .apitable_signatures,  BootloaderAPI_Signatures,  8)
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules
+DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA
+include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk
+include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk
+
+# Include common DMBS build system modules
+DMBS_PATH      ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk
+include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/makefile b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e030ad44a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lib/lufa/Bootloaders/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile to build all the LUFA USB Bootloaders. Call with "make all" to
+# rebuild all bootloaders.
+
+# Bootloaders are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
+# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
+# code.
+
+PROJECT_DIRECTORIES := $(shell ls -d */)
+
+# This makefile is potentially infinitely recursive if something really bad
+# happens when determining the set of project directories - hard-abort if
+# more than 10 levels deep to avoid angry emails.
+ifeq ($(MAKELEVEL), 10)
+   $(error EMERGENCY ABORT: INFINITE RECURSION DETECTED)
+endif
+
+# Need to special-case building without a per-project object directory
+ifeq ($(OBJDIR),)
+   # If no target specified, force "clean all" and disallow parallel build
+   ifeq ($(MAKECMDGOALS),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean all
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+
+   # If one of the targets is to build, force "clean" beforehand and disallow parallel build
+   ifneq ($(findstring all, $(MAKECMDGOALS)),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+endif
+
+%: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
+	@echo . > /dev/null
+
+$(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES):
+	@$(MAKE) -C $@ $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+
+.PHONY: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)